Ricoh aficio сервис мануал

Сервисный мануал ricoh Скачать бесплатно мануал Aficio MP 1500, 1600, 2000, 1600L, 2000L

Сервисный мануал ricoh Скачать бесплатно мануал Aficio MP 1500, 1600, 2000, 1600L, 2000L.pdf

Скачать бесплатно мануал Aficio MP 1500, 1600, 2000, 1600L, 2000L.pdf

Сервисный мануал ricoh Скачать бесплатно мануал Aficio MP 2352, MP 2852, MP 3352, MP 2852 SP, MP 3352 SP

Сервисный мануал ricoh Скачать бесплатно мануал Aficio MP 2352, MP 2852, MP 3352, MP 2852 SP, MP 3352 SP.pdf

Скачать бесплатно мануал Aficio MP 2352, MP 2852, MP 3352, MP 2852 SP, MP 3352 SP.pdf

Сервисный мануал ricoh Скачать бесплатно мануал Aficio 1060, 1075, 2060, 2075, 2051

Сервисный мануал ricoh Скачать бесплатно мануал Aficio 1060, 1075, 2060, 2075, 2051.pdf

Скачать бесплатно мануал Aficio 1060, 1075, 2060, 2075, 2051.pdf

• Contents

• Table of Contents

• Troubleshooting

• Bookmarks

Summary of Contents for Ricoh Aficio MP C305SP

Free Download Field Service Manual and Parts Catalog for Ricoh SP 200 Series

Model OP-P1/MF1
Machine Code: M133, M134, M135, M141, M142, M143, M144, M145, M146, M147, M148, M149, M150, M151, M162, M163, M164, M165, M166, M167, M168, M169, M191

Model Da-P1. Machine Code: M187.

Field Service Manual, Parts Catalog and User Guide.

Model S-C2 (Machine Code: B129/B130/B168/B169)

SERVICE MANUAL

9 March 2004Subject to change

1

!IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY

1. Be sure that the power cord is unplugged before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier or peripherals.

2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. 3. Note that electrical voltage is supplied to some components of the copier

and the paper tray unit even while the main power switch is off. 4. If you start a job before the copier completes the warm-up or initializing

period, keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components until job execution has started. The copier will start making copies as soon as warm-up or initialization is finished.

5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

Toner and developer are nontoxic, but getting either of these into your eyes may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water. If material remains in eye or if discomfort continues, get medical attention. OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those relevant models. LITHIUM BATTERIES Incorrect replacement of lithium battery(s) on the FCU may pose risk of explosion. Replace only with the same type or with an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer�s instructions. SAFE AND ECOLOGICAL DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly if exposed to an open flame.

2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local regulations. (These are nontoxic supplies.)

3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.

2

LASER SAFETY The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.

!WARNING Use of controls not specified in this manual, or performance of adjustments or procedures not specified in this manual, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

!WARNING FOR LASER UNIT WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the

procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can cause serious damage to eyes.

CAUTION MARKING:

B130R934.WMF

Symbols and Abbreviations This manual uses the symbols and abbreviations shown below.

Symbol Meaning ☛ «See,» «Refer to» ! Clip ring » Screw # Connector

SEF Short Edge Feed LEF Long Edge Feed $ Core Technology manual

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INSTALLATION………………………………………………………………… 1-1 1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS………………………………………………….. 1-1

1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT …………………………………………………………………… 1-1 1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL …………………………………………………………………. 1-2 1.1.3 MINIMUM OPERATIONAL SPACE REQUIREMENTS ………………. 1-2 1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS…………………………………………………….. 1-3

1.2 COPIER………………………………………………………………………………………. 1-4 1.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK…………………………………………………………… 1-4

Basic Model……………………………………………………………………………… 1-4 MFP Model………………………………………………………………………………. 1-4 Copier/Facsimile Model……………………………………………………………… 1-5 Copier/Printer/Scanner Model …………………………………………………….. 1-5

1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE……………………………………………….. 1-6 1.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT…………………………………………………………………….. 1-12

1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK…………………………………………………………. 1-12 1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE……………………………………………… 1-12

1.4 PAPER TRAY UNIT HEATER ………………………………………………………. 1-14 1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK…………………………………………………………. 1-14 1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE……………………………………………… 1-15

1.5 DOCUMENT FEEDER…………………………………………………………………. 1-20 1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK…………………………………………………………. 1-20 1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE……………………………………………… 1-21

1.6 PRINTER SCANNER UNIT ………………………………………………………….. 1-25 1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK…………………………………………………………. 1-25 1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE……………………………………………… 1-26

1.7 POSTSCRIPT 3………………………………………………………………………….. 1-31 1.8 IEEE 1284/IEEE 1394/BLUETOOTH INTERFACE ………………………….. 1-32 1.9 WIRELESS LAN …………………………………………………………………………. 1-33

1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK…………………………………………………………. 1-33 1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE……………………………………………… 1-33

1.10 BLUETOOTH……………………………………………………………………………. 1-36 1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK……………………………………………………….. 1-36 1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE……………………………………………. 1-36

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE …………………………………………… 2-1 2.1 PM TABLES…………………………………………………………………………………. 2-1 2.2 HOW TO CLEAR THE PM COUNTER…………………………………………….. 2-2

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT…………………………………. 3-1 3.1 PRECAUTIONS……………………………………………………………………………. 3-1

3.1.1 GENERAL……………………………………………………………………………. 3-1 3.1.2 LITHIUM BATTERIES……………………………………………………………. 3-1 3.1.3 HALOGEN-FREE CABLE………………………………………………………. 3-1

3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS …………………………………………….. 3-2

ii

3.3 EXTERIOR COVER AND OPERATION PANEL ……………………………….. 3-3 3.3.1 PLATEN COVER ………………………………………………………………….. 3-3 3.3.2 REAR COVER ……………………………………………………………………… 3-3 3.3.3 COPY TRAY ………………………………………………………………………… 3-4

Reassembling ………………………………………………………………………….. 3-4 3.3.4 SCALE PLATE……………………………………………………………………… 3-4 3.3.5 OPERATION PANEL AND UPPER COVERS …………………………… 3-5 3.3.6 RIGHT DOOR………………………………………………………………………. 3-6 3.3.7 BYPASS TRAY…………………………………………………………………….. 3-6 3.3.8 PLATEN COVER SENSOR ……………………………………………………. 3-7

3.4 SCANNER UNIT…………………………………………………………………………… 3-8 3.4.1 EXPOSURE GLASS ……………………………………………………………… 3-8

Non-ADF machines…………………………………………………………………… 3-8 ADF-equipped machines……………………………………………………………. 3-8

3.4.2 LENS BLOCK ………………………………………………………………………. 3-9 3.4.3 EXPOSURE LAMP, LAMP STABILIZER BOARD ……………………… 3-9 3.4.4 SCANNER MOTOR …………………………………………………………….. 3-10 3.4.5 SCANNER HP SENSOR ……………………………………………………… 3-10 3.4.6 SCANNER ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT………………………………… 3-11

3.5 FUSING …………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-12 3.5.1 FUSING UNIT …………………………………………………………………….. 3-12 3.5.2 EXIT SENSOR……………………………………………………………………. 3-12 3.5.3 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER PAWLS………………………………………… 3-13 3.5.4 HOT ROLLER & FUSING LAMP …………………………………………… 3-14 3.5.5 THERMO-SWITCH AND THERMISTOR………………………………… 3-15 3.5.6 PRESSURE ROLLER………………………………………………………….. 3-16 3.5.7 ADJUSTING NIP BAND……………………………………………………….. 3-17 3.5.8 DUPLEX MOTOR ……………………………………………………………….. 3-18 3.5.9 CONTACT-RELEASE SOLENOID ………………………………………… 3-18

3.6 PCU AND QUENCHING LAMP …………………………………………………….. 3-19 3.6.1 PCU ………………………………………………………………………………….. 3-19 3.6.2 QUENCHING LAMP ……………………………………………………………. 3-20

3.7 TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH…………………………………………………………… 3-21 3.8 HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY BOARD ………………………………….. 3-21 3.9 EXHAUST FAN AND MAIN MOTOR……………………………………………… 3-22

3.9.1 EXHAUST FAN…………………………………………………………………… 3-22 3.9.2 MAIN MOTOR…………………………………………………………………….. 3-22

3.10 PAPER FEED…………………………………………………………………………… 3-23 3.10.1 PAPER FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD ………………………. 3-23 3.10.2 PAPER END SENSOR ………………………………………………………. 3-23 3.10.3 REGISTRATION SENSOR…………………………………………………. 3-24 3.10.4 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR…………………………………………. 3-24 3.10.5 BYPASS FEED ROLLER……………………………………………………. 3-25 3.10.6 BYPASS FEED CLUTCH AND FRICTION PAD…………………….. 3-26 3.10.7 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION CLUTCHES…………………. 3-27

3.11 IMAGE TRANSFER…………………………………………………………………… 3-28 3.11.1 TRANSFER ROLLER ………………………………………………………… 3-28 3.11.2 ID SENSOR AND DUPLEX ROLLER …………………………………… 3-28 3.11.3 DISCHARGE PLATE …………………………………………………………. 3-29

iii

3.12 CONTROLLER BOX AND BICU………………………………………………….. 3-30 3.13 LASER UNIT…………………………………………………………………………….. 3-32

3.13.1 LOCATION OF CAUTION DECAL……………………………………….. 3-32 3.13.2 PSU ………………………………………………………………………………… 3-33 3.13.3 LASER UNIT…………………………………………………………………….. 3-34 3.13.4 LD UNIT AND POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR………………………… 3-34

3.14 ADJUSTING COPY IMAGE AREA ………………………………………………. 3-35 3.14.1 PRINTING………………………………………………………………………… 3-35

Adjusting Registration ……………………………………………………………… 3-35 Adjusting Blank Margin ……………………………………………………………. 3-36 Adjusting Main-Scan Magnification ……………………………………………. 3-36

3.14.2 SCANNING………………………………………………………………………. 3-37 Adjusting Registration ……………………………………………………………… 3-37 Adjusting Magnification ……………………………………………………………. 3-37 Standard White Density Adjustment…………………………………………… 3-38

3.14.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ……………………………………………….. 3-39

4. TROUBLESHOOTING……………………………………………………….. 4-1 4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS……………………………………………………….. 4-1

4.1.1 SUMMARY…………………………………………………………………………… 4-1 4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS……………………………………………………. 4-2

4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS………………………………………… 4-11 4.2.1 SENSOR/SWITCH OPEN ERRORS ……………………………………… 4-11 4.2.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS……………………………………………….. 4-12

4.3 LED DISPLAY…………………………………………………………………………….. 4-12 4.3.1 BICU …………………………………………………………………………………. 4-12

5. SERVICE TABLES……………………………………………………………. 5-1 5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM……………………………………………………………………. 5-1

5.1.1 USING SP AND SSP MODES………………………………………………… 5-1 Starting SP Mode……………………………………………………………………… 5-1 Starting SSP Mode……………………………………………………………………. 5-2 Selecting Programs…………………………………………………………………… 5-2 Specifying Values……………………………………………………………………… 5-2 Activating Copy Mode ……………………………………………………………….. 5-2 Quitting Programs/Ending (S)SP Mode………………………………………… 5-2

5.1.2 SP MODE TABLES�BASIC MODEL ……………………………………….. 5-3 SP1-XXX (Feed) ………………………………………………………………………. 5-3 SP2-XXX (Drum)………………………………………………………………………. 5-5 SP4-XXX (Scanner) ………………………………………………………………….. 5-9 SP5-XXX (Mode)…………………………………………………………………….. 5-13 SP6-XXX (Peripherals) ……………………………………………………………. 5-16 SP7-XXX (Data Log) ……………………………………………………………….. 5-17 SP8-XXX (History) ………………………………………………………………….. 5-20

5.1.3 SP MODE TABLES�OTHER MODELS ………………………………….. 5-22 SP1-XXX (Feed) …………………………………………………………………….. 5-22 SP2-XXX (Drum)…………………………………………………………………….. 5-24 SP4-XXX (Scanner) ………………………………………………………………… 5-28 SP5-XXX (Mode)…………………………………………………………………….. 5-33

iv

SP6-XXX (Peripherals) ……………………………………………………………. 5-46 SP7-XXX (Data Log) ……………………………………………………………….. 5-47 SP8-XXX (History) ………………………………………………………………….. 5-51

5.1.4 ID SENSOR ERROR ANALYSIS (SP2-221)……………………………. 5-61 5.1.5 MEMORY CLEAR……………………………………………………………….. 5-62

Basic Model and Other Models …………………………………………………. 5-62 Exceptions……………………………………………………………………………… 5-62 Initializing Memory Data…………………………………………………………… 5-62 Executing Memory Clear on Basic Model …………………………………… 5-63 Executing Memory Clear on Other Models …………………………………. 5-63

5.1.6 INPUT CHECK (SP5-803) ……………………………………………………. 5-64 Conducting Input Check…………………………………………………………… 5-64 Input Check Table …………………………………………………………………… 5-64

5.1.7 OUTPUT CHECK (SP5-804) ………………………………………………… 5-65 Conducting Output Check ………………………………………………………… 5-65 Output Check Table ………………………………………………………………… 5-65

5.1.8 SERIAL NUMBER INPUT (SP5-811-001) ………………………………. 5-66 Specifying Characters ……………………………………………………………… 5-66 Serial Number and NVRAM ……………………………………………………… 5-66

5.1.9 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD (SP5-824/825) …………….. 5-67 Overview ……………………………………………………………………………….. 5-67 NVRAM Upload (SP5-824-001) ………………………………………………… 5-67 NVRAM Download (SP5-825-001)…………………………………………….. 5-68

5.1.10 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR BASIC MODEL …….. 5-69 5.1.11 TEST PATTERN PRINT (SP5-902-001)……………………………….. 5-70

Executing Test Pattern Printing…………………………………………………. 5-70 Test Patterns………………………………………………………………………….. 5-70

5.1.12 SMC PRINT (SP5-990)………………………………………………………. 5-71 5.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE…………………………………………….. 5-72

5.2.1 HANDLING SD CARD …………………………………………………………. 5-72 5.2.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE …………………………………….. 5-72 5.2.3 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD…………………………………… 5-76

Uploading NVRAM Data ………………………………………………………….. 5-76 Downloading SD Card Data ……………………………………………………… 5-77

5.3 USER TOOLS…………………………………………………………………………….. 5-78

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS………………………………… 6-1 6.1 PAPER PATH………………………………………………………………………………. 6-1 6.2 DRIVE LAYOUT …………………………………………………………………………… 6-2 6.3 BLOCK DIAGRAM: PCBS AND COMPONENTS ………………………………. 6-3 6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING STEPS FOR EACH MODE……………………………. 6-4 6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCHES ……………………………………………………………….. 6-5 6.6 IMAGE TRANSFER CURRENT ……………………………………………………… 6-6 6.7 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT ………………………………………………… 6-7

6.7.1 OVERVIEW………………………………………………………………………….. 6-7 6.7.2 HOT ROLLER DRIVE ……………………………………………………………. 6-8

Mechanism………………………………………………………………………………. 6-8 Contact/Release Control ……………………………………………………………. 6-8

v

6.7.3 PRESSURE ROLLER……………………………………………………………. 6-9 6.7.4 PRESSURE RELEASE………………………………………………………….. 6-9 6.7.5 SEPARATION………………………………………………………………………. 6-9 6.7.6 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL……………………………………. 6-10

Control Process………………………………………………………………………. 6-10 Target Temperature ………………………………………………………………… 6-10 Temperature Transition……………………………………………………………. 6-10 Overheat Protection ………………………………………………………………… 6-11

6.8 DUPLEX UNIT ……………………………………………………………………………. 6-12 6.8.1 IMPORTANT COMPONENT…………………………………………………. 6-12 6.8.2 DUPLEX PRINTING PROCESS……………………………………………. 6-12

6.9 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF BASIC MACHINES………………………….. 6-15 Overview ……………………………………………………………………………….. 6-15 AOF………………………………………………………………………………………. 6-16 Timers …………………………………………………………………………………… 6-16 Recovery……………………………………………………………………………….. 6-16

6.10 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF MFP MACHINES …………………………… 6-17 Overview ……………………………………………………………………………….. 6-17 AOF………………………………………………………………………………………. 6-17 Timers …………………………………………………………………………………… 6-19 Recovery……………………………………………………………………………….. 6-19

PERIPHERALS DOCUMENT FEEDER (B696)

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT…………………………….B696-1 1.1 EXTERIOR COVER…………………………………………………………………. B696-1 1.2 ORIGINAL TABLE …………………………………………………………………… B696-1 1.3 ROLLER ………………………………………………………………………………… B696-2

1.3.1 PICKUP ROLLER ……………………………………………………………. B696-2 1.3.2 FEED ROLLER……………………………………………………………….. B696-3 1.3.3 SEPARATION ROLLER …………………………………………………… B696-3

1.4 ADF MOTOR ………………………………………………………………………….. B696-4 1.5 FEED CLUTCH……………………………………………………………………….. B696-6 1.6 SENSOR………………………………………………………………………………… B696-6 1.7 ADF EXPOSURE GLASS…………………………………………………………. B696-8 1.8 ADF CONNECTION BOARD…………………………………………………….. B696-8

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ………………………………………….B696-9 2.1 OVERVIEW ……………………………………………………………………………. B696-9

2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT …………………………………………… B696-9 2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT…………………………………………… B696-10 2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT…………………………………………………………….. B696-11

2.2 CIRCUIT CONNECTION ………………………………………………………… B696-12 2.3 ORIGINAL DETECTION…………………………………………………………. B696-12

vi

2.4 PAPER TRANSPORT…………………………………………………………….. B696-13 2.4.1 PICK-UP AND FEED ……………………………………………………… B696-13 2.4.2 SEPARATION……………………………………………………………….. B696-13 2.4.3 REGISTRATION……………………………………………………………. B696-13

2.5 CORRECTION………………………………………………………………………. B696-14 2.5.1 WHITE LEVEL CORRECTION ………………………………………… B696-14 2.5.2 SHADING CORRECTION……………………………………………….. B696-14

2.6 UNIT OPEN SWITCH AND GUIDE OPEN SENSOR ………………….. B696-14

SPECIFICATIONS………………………………………………………….. SPEC-1 1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS…………………………………………………….SPEC-1

1.1 COPIER ……………………………………………………………………………SPEC-1 1.2 FAX………………………………………………………………………………….SPEC-3 1.3 PRINTER AND SCANNER ………………………………………………….SPEC-3 1.4 ADF………………………………………………………………………………….SPEC-3

2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZE ……………………………………………………….SPEC-4 2.1 ORIGINAL PAPER SIZE……………………………………………………..SPEC-4 2.2 PAPER FEED ……………………………………………………………………SPEC-5

3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION …………………………………………………….SPEC-6 3.1 BASIC MODEL (B129)………………………………………………………..SPEC-6 3.2 COPIER/PRINTER/SCANNER MODEL (B169)………………………SPEC-7 3.3 COPIER/FAX MODEL (B168)………………………………………………SPEC-8 3.4 MFP MODEL (B130)…………………………………………………………..SPEC-9

4. OPTION…………………………………………………………………………………SPEC-10 4.1 PRINTER/SCANNER UNIT ……………………………………………….SPEC-10 4.2 ADF………………………………………………………………………………..SPEC-10 4.3 PAPER FEED UNIT………………………………………………………..SPEC-10

9 March 2004 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1-1

Inst

alla

tion1. INSTALLATION

!!!!CAUTION Before installing an optional unit, do the following: 1. If there is a fax unit on the machine, print out all messages stored in the

memory, all user-programmed items, and a system parameter list. 2. If there is a printer option on the machine, print out all data in the

printer buffer. 3. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone

line, and the network cable.

1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT

�Temperature and Humidity Chart�

1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F) 2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH 3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (Do not expose to direct sunlight.) 4. Ventilation: Room air should turn over at least 3 times/hr/person 5. Ambient Dust Less than 0.1 mg/m3 6. Do not install the machine where it will be exposed to direct sunlight or to direct

airflow (from a fan, air conditioner, air cleaner, etc.). 7. Do not install the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gas. 8. Place the machine on a firm and level base. 9. Do not install the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibration.

Humidity

10°C(50°F)

27°C(80.6°F)

32°C(89.6°F)

15%

54%

80%

Temperature

Operation range

B046I512.WMF

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 9 March 2004

1-2

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2″) of level Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2″) of level 1.1.3 MINIMUM OPERATIONAL SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.

NOTE: 1) The 750-mm front space indicated above is sufficient to allow the paper tray to be pulled out. Additional space is required to allow an operator to stand at the front of the machine.

2) Actual minimum space requirement for left, rear, and right sides is 10mm (0.4″) each, but note that this will not allow room for opening of the bypass tray, right door, platen cover, or ADF unit.

B046I130.WMF

A: Front � 750 mm (29.6″)B: Left � 100 mm (3.9″) C: Rear � 105 mm (4.1″) D: Right � 230 mm (9.0″)

[C]

[D] [B]

[A]

450 mm (17.7″)

468 mm (18.4″)

9 March 2004 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1-3

Inst

alla

tion

1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

!CAUTION 1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the machine and easily accessible.

After completing installation, make sure the plug fits firmly into the outlet.

2. Avoid multi-wiring. 3. Be sure to ground the machine.

Input voltage: North America: 110 � 120 V, 60 Hz, 8 A Europe: 220 � 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 4 A

Image quality guaranteed at rated voltage ± 10%. Operation guaranteed at rated voltage ± 15%.

COPIER 9 March 2004

1-4

1.2 COPIER 1.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Basic Model Description Q�ty

1. General Settings Guide (-17, -21, -29)……………………………………….. 1 2. Copy Reference (-17, -21, -29) …………………………………………………. 1 3. EU Safety Sheet (-22, -24, -26, -27) ………………………………………….. 1 4. NECR (-17, -21, -27, -29)…………………………………………………………. 1 5. Paper Size Decal ……………………………………………………………………. 1 6. Brand Decal (-22, -29) …………………………………………………………….. 1

MFP Model Description Q�ty

1. General Settings Guide (-17, -21, -29)……………………………………….. 1 2. Copy Reference (-17, -21, -29) …………………………………………………. 1 3. Facsimile Reference <Basic Features> (-17, -21, -29) …………………. 1 4. Facsimile Reference <Advanced Features> (-17, -21, -29) …………… 1 5. Printer Setup Guide (-17, -21, -29)…………………………………………….. 1 6. CD-ROM (Printer Reference/Scanner Reference) (-17, -21, -29) …… 1 7. CD-ROM (Driver: Printer/Scanner) (-21, -22, -24, -26, -27, -29) …….. 1 8. CD-ROM (Driver: Utility)…………………………………………………………… 1 9. EU Safety Sheet (-22, -24, -26, -27) ………………………………………….. 1 10. NECR (-17, -21, -27, -29)……………………………………………………….. 1 11. Paper Size Decal ………………………………………………………………….. 1 12. Modular Cable (-17) ………………………………………………………………. 1 13. Handset Bracket (-17) ……………………………………………………………. 1 14. Facsimile Panel Decal (-17, -21, -29)……………………………………….. 1 15. Ferrite Core………………………………………………………………………….. 1 16. Brand decals (-22, -29) ………………………………………………………….. 1

NOTE: Retain the handset bracket. The optional handset kit does not include the bracket.

9 March 2004 COPIER

1-5

Inst

alla

tion

Copier/Facsimile Model Description Q�ty

1. General Settings Guide (-17, -21, -29)……………………………… 1 2. Copy Reference (-17, -21, -29) ……………………………………….. 1 3. Facsimile Reference <Basic Features> (-17, -21, -29) ……….. 1 4. Facsimile Reference <Advanced Features> (-17, -21, -29) …. 1 5. EU Safety Sheet (-22, -24, -26, -27) ………………………………… 1 6. NECR (-17, -21, -27, -29)……………………………………………….. 1 7. Paper Size Decal ………………………………………………………….. 1 8. Modular Cable (-17) ………………………………………………………. 1 9. Handset Bracket (-17) ……………………………………………………. 1 10. Facsimile Panel Decal (-17, -21, -29)……………………………… 1 11. Brand decals (-22) ………………………………………………………. 1

NOTE: Retain the handset bracket. The optional handset kit does not include the bracket.

Copier/Printer/Scanner Model Description Q�ty

1. CD-ROM (Driver: Printer/Scanner) (-22, -24, -26)…………….. 1 2. CD-ROM (Driver: Utility)……………………………………………….. 1 3. EU Safety Sheet …………………………………………………………. 1 4. NECR (-27) ………………………………………………………………… 1 5. Paper Size Decal ………………………………………………………… 1 6. Ferrite Core………………………………………………………………… 1 7. Brand decals (-22) ………………………………………………………. 1

COPIER 9 March 2004

1-6

1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

!CAUTION Make sure that the copier remains unplugged during installation.

1. Remove the strips of tape. 2. Remove the bags [A][B][C] holding the

included accessories. NOTE: Accessories vary according to

models.

3. Remove the spacing wedge [D]. 4. Remove the System Parameter

Report [E] and keep it in a safe place. NOTE: You need this report for

adjustment or troubleshooting.

B130I901.WMF

B130I902.WMF

[C]

[A]

[B]

[D]

[E]

9 March 2004 COPIER

1-7

Inst

alla

tion

5. Remove the three scanner lock pins. (A tag is hanging from each pin.) To remove: Grasp the base of the pin [A], turn the pin 90 degrees, and pull it down and out.

6. Remove the tags from the pins. 7. Break each pin off the base [A]. 8. Discard the pin part [B].

9. Set each base [A] back into its original hole, turning it 90° to lock it into place. (Be sure to do this for all three pins.)

10. When installing a DF-equipped model, raise the DF upper guide [C] and remove the protective paper [D] at the feed unit. Then lower the guide.

11. Open the platen cover [E] and remove the protective paper [F] covering the exposure glass. Then close the platen cover.

B046I106.WMF

B046I107.WMF

[E]

[F]

[C]

[D]

[A]

[B]

COPIER 9 March 2004

1-8

12. Open the front door [A]. 13. Lift lever [B], press in on latch [C]

and pull the bottle holder [D] out. (You do not need to pull it completely out of the machine.)

14. Take a new bottle of toner, and shake it several times.

15. Remove the outer cap [E]. NOTE: Do not remove the inner

cap [F]. 16. Load the bottle on the holder.

NOTE: Do not forcefully turn the toner bottle on the holder. After you turn on the main power switch, the copier sets the bottle in place.

17. Push the bottle holder back into the machine.

18. Press the latch [G] down to lock the holder.

B046I112.WMF

B046I301.WMF

[C]

[B] [D][A]

[E]

[F]

[G]

9 March 2004 COPIER

1-9

Inst

alla

tion

19. Remove the padding [A]. 20. Pull the tabbed strips [B] out of

the PCU. 21. Close the front door. 22. Pull out the paper tray, and

remove the tape [C] securing the end fence in the compartment.

23. Push the bottom plate [D] down. 24. Load the paper.

25. Adjust the side fences. If you load the paper shorter than A4, set the end fence [E] in position.

B130I903.WMF

B046I119.WMF

[C]

[D]

[E]

[A]

[B]

COPIER 9 March 2004

1-10

26. Push the tray back in the copier. 27. Attach the appropriate Brand Decal

to the center of the front door [A] if necessary.

28. Attach the appropriate tray number decal and paper-size decal to the paper tray [B].

29. Install optional units (if any).

30. Attach the ferrite core to the network cable when connecting the cable.

31. Connect a telephone line as necessary.

32. Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch.

B046I515.WMF

B130I909.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

9 March 2004 COPIER

1-11

Inst

alla

tion

33. Select the language used in the operation panel as necessary (! > Language).

34. Make a full size copy, and check if the side-to-side and leading edge registrations are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations.

The following steps are for the MFP model, the copier/facsimile model, and the copier/printer/scanner model only:

35. Activate the SP mode. 36. Select Copy SP 5-302-002 (Time) and specify the time difference. 37. Quit the SP mode. 38. Activate the User Tools (!). 39. Specify the date and time (System Settings > Timer Settings > Set Date/Set

Time). 40. Quit the User Tools. 41. Activate the SP mode. 42. Select Copy SP5-307. 43. Specify the daylight-saving-time settings. 44. Quit the SP mode.

PAPER TRAY UNIT 9 March 2004

1-12

1.3 PAPER TRAY UNIT 1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Confirm that you have the accessories indicated below.

Description Q�ty 1. Paper-size decals ……………………………………………………… 1 sheet 2. Installation Procedure (for service person)…………………….. 1 3. Installation Procedure (for user)…………………………………… 1

1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

!CAUTION

Unplug the main machine’s power cord before starting the following procedure.

1. Remove the tape at [A], and the tape and cardboard at [B]. 2. Pull the paper tray part way out of the

unit, remove the tape and cardboard at [C], and push the tray back in.

B046I516.WMF [A]

[B]

[C]

9 March 2004 PAPER TRAY UNIT

1-13

Inst

alla

tion3. Set the machine onto the paper tray unit.

4. Remove the paper tray from the paper tray unit. 5. Load paper into the paper tray. Adjust the side and end fences as necessary. If

loading 81/2″x 14″ paper, remove the end fence and set it into the special compartment.

6. Set the paper tray back into the paper tray unit. 7. Stick on the appropriate tray-number

decal and paper-size decal, at the locations indicated in the illustration.

B046I527.WMF

B046I517.WMF

PAPER TRAY UNIT HEATER 9 March 2004

1-14

1.4 PAPER TRAY UNIT HEATER 1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Confirm that you have the accessories indicated below. Description Q�ty

1. Grounding wire………………………………………………………….. 1 2. Relay harness …………………………………………………………… 1 3. Clamps ……………………………………………………………………. 2 4. Ferrite core……………………………………………………………….. 1 5. Heater fastening screws……………………………………………… 2 6. PTU fastening screws ………………………………………………… 3 7. Grounding screw……………………………………………………….. 1 8. Decal for copier…………………………………………………………. 1 9. Decal for paper unit……………………………………………………. 1 10. Tie wrap …………………………………………………………………. 1

B046I518.WMF

1

5 9

3

2

4

7

8

10

6

9 March 2004 PAPER TRAY UNIT HEATER

1-15

Inst

alla

tion

1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

!CAUTION

Unplug the main machine’s power cord before starting the following procedure.

1. Remove the paper tray unit from the copier if it is already installed. 2. Remove the paper trays from the copier and from the paper tray unit.

3. Remove the ground screw [A] at the rear of the paper tray unit.

4. Fasten the heater [B] and the supplied ground wire [C] to the paper tray unit (» x 3). Note that [A] is the ground screw you removed in the previous step and [D] and [E] are the two supplied heater fastening screws. NOTE: Be sure to position the ground

wire [C] and heater harness [F] so that they are out of the way of the copier when you set it onto the paper tray unit.

5. Set the copier onto the paper tray unit. 6. Screw the paper tray unit into place

using three supplied PTU fastening screws.

B046I519.WMF

B046I500.WMF

[B]

[C] [A]

[D]

[E]

[F]

PAPER TRAY UNIT HEATER 9 March 2004

1-16

7. Open the front door [A].

8. Remove the copy tray [B] («×1). 9. Close the front door. 10. Remove the memory card cover [C] («

x 1). 11. Remove the rear cover [D] (» x 5).

12. Remove the upper left cover [E]. 13. Remove the BICU cover [F] (» x 3) or the controller box [G] (# x 1, » x 5).

B046I501.WMF

B130R901.WMF

B130R933.WMF

B130R921.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]

[F]

[G]

[E]

[E]

9 March 2004 PAPER TRAY UNIT HEATER

1-17

Inst

alla

tion

14. Remove the support bracket [A] (» x 2).

15. Pass the heater harness through the hole [B] at the rear of the copier.

16. Pass relay harness [C] through the opening [D] (at the rear of the PSU) and through the other opening [B].

17. Connect the relay harness to the heater’s harness [E].

B130I905.WMF

B046I520.WMF

[A]

[B] [C]

[D]

[E]

PAPER TRAY UNIT HEATER 9 March 2004

1-18

18. Pull the relay harness back into

the copier. 19. Attach the ferrite core [A] over the

relay harness. 20. Push the ferrite core back so that

it is over the heater’s harness. 21. Wrap the heater’s harness once

around the ferrite core [B]. 22. Locate the ferrite core at the rear of

the copier [A] behind the rear clamp.

23. Secure the ferrite core with the supplied tie wrap [C].

24. Clip off the excess length of the tie wrap [D]. 25. Connect the relay harness connector [E] to the large connector at the front

center of the PSU. 26. Screw the ground wire [F] to the PSU bracket with the included grounding

screw. 27. Attach the clamps [G] to the PSU bracket. 28. Attach the heater harness though the clamps. 29. Position the harness so that the front clamp is between the two bindings [H] on

the harness. 30. Fasten the clamps.

B046I521.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[H]

[G]

9 March 2004 PAPER TRAY UNIT HEATER

1-19

Inst

alla

tion

31. Pull the excess length of the heater’s harness out the opening at the rear [A]. NOTE: Be sure that the harness

passes on the side of the grounding plate [B] at the bottom of the opening. (The front of the grounding plate must remain clear.)

32. Arrange the excess harness length so that it sits beneath the FCU cover plate.

33. Attach the caution decals to the

locations shown in the illustration. 34. Reassemble the copier. 35. Plug in the power cord, and check the

operations.

B046I522.WMF

B046I523.WMF

[A] [B]

DOCUMENT FEEDER 9 March 2004

1-20

1.5 DOCUMENT FEEDER 1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Description Q�ty 1. ADF connection board ……………………………………………….. 1 2. Cable……………………………………………………………………….. 1 3. ADF body…………………………………………………………………. 1 4. Screw M3 x 6 ……………………………………………………………. 2 5. Hex screw ………………………………………………………………… 4 6. Hex wrench ………………………………………………………………. 1 7. ADF original table ……………………………………………………… 1 8. Installation procedure…………………………………………………. 1

B696I908.WMF

7

4

1

2 3

5

6

9 March 2004 DOCUMENT FEEDER

1-21

Inst

alla

tion

1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

!CAUTION

Unplug the main machine’s power cord before starting the following procedure.

1. Unpack the ADF and remove the packing tape from the bottom of the ADF body.

2. Lift the platen cover [A], unlatch the

two latches [B] (press down on the tabs [C]), and detach the cover from the hook [D].

3. Push the left piece [E] to the left

and pull it up and off.

B046I505.WMF

B046I525.WMF

[A][B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

DOCUMENT FEEDER 9 March 2004

1-22

4. Place the ADF original table [A]

on the platen cover. 5. Insert the three latches into the

openings. NOTE: The latches may break if

you try to push the table in at an angle.

6. Make sure that that the contact area [B] around each latch is flush against the cover.

7. Remove the memory card cover [C] (» x 1)

8. Remove the rear cover [D] (» x 5).

B696I909.WMF

B696I902.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

9 March 2004 DOCUMENT FEEDER

1-23

Inst

alla

tion

9. Remove the left scale plate [A] (» x 2).

10. Remove the upper left cover [B]. 11. Set the ADF body [C] onto the

copier. 12. Press the latch [D] to raise the

top half of the body. 13. Fasten the ADF body with the

hex screws (» x 4). NOTE: Use the hex wrench.

B696I904.WMF

B696I903.WMF

[A]

[D] [C]

[B]

DOCUMENT FEEDER 9 March 2004

1-24

14. Remove the ADF connection board guard [A] (if installed) (» x 2). 15. Insert the top of the ADF connection board [B] into the bracket [C]. 16. Fasten the screw [D].

NOTE: Fasten this screw before fastening the other screw [E]. 17. Fasten the screw [E]. 18. Connect the cables on the ADF connection board:

• CN303 • CN306 • CN305 • CN307

19. Fix the cables with the clamp [F]. 20. Connect the cables [G] between the ADF connection board and the BICU:

• ADF connection board CN302 ↔ BICU CN109 • ADF connection board CN301 ↔ BICU CN110

21. Fasten the cables with the clamp [H]. 22. Reassemble the whole copier. 23. Plug in the power cord, and turn on the main switch. 24. Make a full-size copy from the paper tray using the ADF, and check the leading

edge registration. Adjust the registration as necessary.

B696I905.WMF

[A]

[B]

[G]

[H]

[C] [D]

[E]

[F]

9 March 2004 PRINTER SCANNER UNIT

1-25

Inst

alla

tion

1.6 PRINTER SCANNER UNIT 1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Description Q�ty 1. ADF Connection Board Guard …………………………………….. 1 2. Screw M3 x 6 ……………………………………………………………. 9 3. Controller Box …………………………………………………………… 1 4. Printer Panel …………………………………………………………….. 1 5. Printer Key ……………………………………………………………….. 2 6. Copier Key ……………………………………………………………….. 2 7. Scanner Key …………………………………………………………….. 2 8. Multi-function Panel …………………………………………………… 1 9. Operation Instruction (Book) ……………………………………….. 1 10. CD-ROM ………………………………………………………………… 1 set 11. FCC Decal (-15)………………………………………………………. 1 12. Ferrite Core…………………………………………………………….. 1 13. Ground Plate…………………………………………………………… 1 14. Installation Procedure ………………………………………………. 1

B683I908.WMF

5

10 3

8

1 2

4

67

9

11

12

13

PRINTER SCANNER UNIT 9 March 2004

1-26

1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

!CAUTION

Unplug the main machine’s power cord before starting the following procedure.

S

1. Remove the memory card cover [A] (» x 1)

2. Remove the rear cover [B] (» x 5).

3. Cut the opening [C] on the rear

cover. This opening is for the network interfaces.

4. Cut another opening [D] on the rear cover. This opening is for the SD card slot and the LAN cable. NOTE: Do not cut the topmost

opening [E] when the machine is the basic model (B129).

5. Remove the upper left cover [F].

B696I902.WMF

B696I907.WMF

[B]

[F]

[A]

[C]

[D]

[E]

9 March 2004 PRINTER SCANNER UNIT

1-27

Inst

alla

tion

6. Install the ground plate [A] (» x 2). NOTE: Insert the upper and lower hooks in the openings [B], and fasten the

upper screw first.

7. Attach connection board guard [C]. NOTE: The North America model (B129-17) has the ADF connection board [D].

8. Fasten the side screw [E]. 9. Fasten the rear screw [F]. 10. Install the controller box [G] (» x 5, # x 1).

NOTE: Insert the bracket [H] into the frame. The connector on the controller box engages with the connector on the BICU.

11. Install PostScript 3 as necessary.

B683I913.WMF

B683I902.WMF

[E]

[A]

[B]

[G]

[H]

[F]

[C]

[D]

PRINTER SCANNER UNIT 9 March 2004

1-28

12. Remove the front left cover [A] (» x 2). NOTE: Retain the screws and use them in the next step.

13. Install the multi-function panel [B] (# x 1, » x 2).

B683I510.WMF

B683I903.WMF

[A]

[B]

9 March 2004 PRINTER SCANNER UNIT

1-29

Inst

alla

tion

14. Remove the panel cover [A]. 15. Remove the filament tape from the printer panel [B]. 16. Install the printer panel. 17. Install one of the printer keys [C]. 18. Remove the key cover [D]. 19. Install one of the copier keys [E].

20. Install one of the scanner keys [F].

B683I109.WMF

B683I916.WMF

[C]

[D]

[F]

[A]

[B]

[E]

PRINTER SCANNER UNIT 9 March 2004

1-30

21. For the North America model only: Attach the FCC decal [A] to the rear side of the copier.

22. Reassemble the whole copier.

23. Attach the ferrite core [B] to the network cable and attach the cable to the copier if a network cable is used. The end of the ferrite core must be about 15 cm (6″) from the end of the cable [C].

24. Plug in the power cord. 25. Perform the Printer/Scanner settings.

1) Turn the main switch on. 2) Start the SP mode. 3) Select SP5-801-001 and execute

the initialization. 4) Turn the main switch off and on. 5) Start the SP mode. 6) Select SP5-302-002 and specify the

time zone. 7) Select SP5-307-001, 003, and 004 and

specify the daylight-saving-time settings. Turn the main switch off and on.

26. Check the operations.

B683I917.WMF

B441I108.WMF

B622I903.WMF

[A]

[B][C]

9 March 2004 POSTSCRIPT 3

1-31

Inst

alla

tion

1.7 POSTSCRIPT 3

1. Remove the memory card cover [A] (» x 1).

2. Remove the rear cover [B] (» x 5). 3. Remove the upper left cover [C] if

the fax control unit is installed.

4. Remove the controller box cover [D] (» x 12).

5. Remove the fax control unit (if installed) [E] (# x 1, » x 3).

6. Install the PostScript 3 emulation board [F]. 7. Reassemble the copier. 8. Plug in the power cord, and turn on the main switch. 9. Check the operations.

B696I902.WMF

B683I904.WMF

B683I905.WMF

[B]

[C]

[F]

[D]

[E]

[A]

IEEE 1284/IEEE 1394/BLUETOOTH INTERFACE 9 March 2004

1-32

1.8 IEEE 1284/IEEE 1394/BLUETOOTH INTERFACE

!CAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.

NOTE: 1) To install an optional network interface, the printer scanner is required. 2) One slot is available. You can install one of the IEEE 1284 interface,

IEEE 1394 interface, wireless LAN interface, and Bluetooth interface.

1. Remove the slot cover [A] (» x 2). 2. Install the interface board [B]

(» x 2).

B683I909.WMF

[B]

[A]

9 March 2004 WIRELESS LAN

1-33

Inst

alla

tion

1.9 WIRELESS LAN 1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories. Description Q�ty

1. Wireless LAN card …………………………………………………….. 1 2. Wireless LAN card cover…………………………………………….. 1 3. Wireless LAN board …………………………………………………… 1

1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

!CAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.

NOTE: 1) To install an optional network interface, the printer scanner is required. 2) One slot is available. You can install one of the IEEE 1284 interface,

IEEE 1394 interface, wireless LAN interface, and Bluetooth interface.

1. Remove the slot cover [A] (» x 2). 2. Turn the card face [B] to the front side of the copier, and insert it to the wireless

LAN (IEEE 802.11b) board [C]. 3. Install the wireless LAN board (with the card) to the slot (» x 2). 4. Attach the cover [D]. 5. If reception is poor, you may need to move the machine:

• Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that can generate a strong magnetic field.

• Position the machine as close as possible to the access point.

B683I919.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]

WIRELESS LAN 9 March 2004

1-34

UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN Enter the UP mode and follow the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 802.11b. These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on. NOTE: The wireless LAN cannot be used if Ethernet is being used.

1. Press the User Tools/Counter key. 2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.

NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN.

3. Select Interface Settings → Network (tab) → LAN Type 4. Select either �Ethernet� or �IEEE 802.11b�. 5. Press IEEE 802.11b. Only the wireless LAN options are displayed. 6. Transmission Mode. Select either �Ad Hoc Mode� or �Infrastructure Mode�. 7. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.) 8. Channel. This setting is required when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.

Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11) NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different

countries. 9. WEP (Privacy) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is

designed to protect wireless data transmission. In order to unlock encoded data, the same WEP key is required on the receiving side. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys.

Range of Allowed Settings: 64 bit 10 characters 128 bit 26 characters

10. Bandwidth Status. This setting is enabled only for the Infrastructure Mode. Press here to display the current status of the bandwidth. One of the following is displayed to reflect the reception status of the wireless LAN:

Good 76 ~ 100% Fair 41 ~ 75% Poor 21 ~ 40% Unavailable 0 ~ 20%

9 March 2004 WIRELESS LAN

1-35

Inst

alla

tion11. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to display more settings, then

select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the closest machine or access point, depending on which mode is selected. NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and

the closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the distance between the machine and the closest access point.

11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.) 5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.) 2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.) 1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.)

12. To initialize the wireless LAN settings, use page 2/2. Press Execute to initialize the following settings: • Transmission mode • Channel • Transmission Speed • WEP • SSID • WEP Key

SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 802.11b

SP No. Name Function 5840 004 SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting. 5840 006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the

country. 5840 007 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed

for your country. 5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00). 5840 018 SSID Check Used to check the SSID. 5840 020 WEP Mode Used to display the maximum length of the string that can

be used for the WEP Key entry.

BLUETOOTH 9 March 2004

1-36

1.10 BLUETOOTH 1.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories. Description Q�ty

1. Bluetooth card…………………………………………………………… 1 2. Bluetooth card cover ………………………………………………….. 1 3. Bluetooth board…………………………………………………………. 1

1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

!CAUTION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.

NOTE: 1) To install an optional network interface, the printer scanner is required. 2) One slot is available. You can install one of the IEEE1 284 interface,

IEEE 1394 interface, wireless LAN interface, and Bluetooth interface.

1. Remove the slot cover [A] (» x 2). 2. Turn the card [B] to the front side of the copier, and insert it to the Bluetooth

board [C]. 3. Install the Bluetooth board (with the card) to the slot (» x 2). 4. Press the antenna [D] to extend it. 5. Attach the cover [E].

B683I920.WMF

[A]

[C] [E]

[B]

[D]

9 March 2004 PM TABLES

2-1

Prev

entiv

eM

aint

enan

ce

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 2.1 PM TABLES Reset the PM counter (SP7-804-001) after your maintenance work (☛ 2.2). Key: AN: As necessary C: Clean R: Replace I: Inspect

Every 45k Every 90k AN NOTE OPTICS Reflector C C Optics cloth 1st mirror C C Optics cloth 2nd mirror C C Optics cloth 3rd mirror C C Optics cloth Platen cover C C Dry cloth Exposure glass C C Dry cloth Toner shield glass C C Dry cloth DRUM AREA PCU R Clean toner-bottle holder. Transfer roller R Discharge plate R PAPER FEED Paper feed roller R C Water or alcohol. Friction pad R C Dry cloth Bottom-plate pad C C Water or alcohol. Registration roller C C Water or alcohol. FUSING UNIT Hot roller R Pressure roller R Hot roller bearings R Pressure-roller bushings I

Inlet guide C Outlet guide C Hot roller stripper pawls R

Thermistor C

HOW TO CLEAR THE PM COUNTER 9 March 2004

2-2

Every 90k AN NOTE

ADF Separation roller R C Water or alcohol Pick-up roller R C Water or alcohol Feed roller R C Water or alcohol White plate C Water or alcohol DF exposure glass C Water Rollers R0, R1, R2 C Water or alcohol

Every 120k AN NOTE PAPER TRAY UNIT Paper feed roller R Bottom-plate pad C Dry cloth Friction pad R

2.2 HOW TO CLEAR THE PM COUNTER Reset the PM counter after your maintenance work.

1. Activate the SP mode. 2. Select SP7-804-001. 3. Press the EXECUTE key [A]. The

message «Completed» is displayed when the program ends normally. An error message is displayed if the program ends abnormally.

4. Press the ! (cancel) key [B] to end the program.

B130P901.WMF

7.804.001 Reset-PM Count

EXECUTE

[A] [B]

9 March 2004 PRECAUTIONS

3-1

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.1 PRECAUTIONS 3.1.1 GENERAL

!CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before starting replacement.

Before turning off the main power switch, check that no mechanical component is operating. Mechanical components may stop out of their home positions if you turn off the main power switch while they are operating. The component may be damaged if you try to remove it when it is not in the home position. 3.1.2 LITHIUM BATTERIES

!CAUTION: Lithium Batteries Incorrect replacement of lithium battery(s) on the controller or on the fax unit poses risk of explosion. Replace only with the same type or with an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer�s instructions.

3.1.3 HALOGEN-FREE CABLE

!CAUTION Use extreme caution while handling cables.

To comply with local regulations, halogen-free cables are used in this machine. Halogen-free cables are environment-friendly, but no stronger than conventional cables. These cables may be damaged in any of the following cases: • The cable is caught between hard objects such as brackets, screws, PCBs, and

exterior covers. • The cable is rubbed on a hard object such as brackets, screws, PCBs, and

exterior covers. • The cable is scratched with a hard object such as brackets, screws, PCBs,

exterior covers, screwdrivers, and fingernails.

SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS 9 March 2004

3-2

3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS Part Number Description Q�ty

A1849501 Optics Adjustment Tools (2 pcs/set) 1 set A2929500 Test Chart � S5S (10 pcs/set) 1 set A0299387 Digital Multimeter � Fluke 87 1 N8036701 Flash Memory Card (4MB) 1 N8031000 Case for Flash Memory Card 1 A2579300 Grease Barrierta � S552R 1 52039501 Silicone Grease G-501 1 G0219350 Loopback connector 1 B6455010 SD Card Assy 1 B6456700 SD Card Adapter BN-SDAA2 1 B6456800 SD Card USB Writer BN-SDCE2 1

9 March 2004 EXTERIOR COVER AND OPERATION PANEL

3-3

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.3 EXTERIOR COVER AND OPERATION PANEL 3.3.1 PLATEN COVER

1. Lift the platen cover [A]. 2. Unlatch the two latches [B].

NOTE: To unlatch, press down on the tabs [C] and then push the latch back. 3. Detach the cover from the hook [D] 3.3.2 REAR COVER

1. Memory card cover [A] (! x 1) 2. Rear cover [B] (! x 5)

B130R943.WMF

B130R901.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[A] [B]

EXTERIOR COVER AND OPERATION PANEL 9 March 2004

3-4

3.3.3 COPY TRAY

!CAUTION Make sure that the cables under the copy tray are in place before reassembling the copier. If these cables are caught between the copy tray and the inner cover, they may be severely damaged.

1. Open the front door [A]. 2. Copy tray [B] (! x 1) Reassembling There are several cables under the front end of the copy tray. To set these cables in place, gently pull these cables to the left-hand side (toward the PSU) and hold them there as you attach the copy tray. 3.3.4 SCALE PLATE

The scale plate is for the following models only: • The copier/printer/scanner model

(B169) • The basic model (B129) in Europe

1. Scale plate [A] (! × 2)

B130R902.WMF

B130R944.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

9 March 2004 EXTERIOR COVER AND OPERATION PANEL

3-5

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.3.5 OPERATION PANEL AND UPPER COVERS

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 2. Slide the upper left cover [A] to the rear. 3. Rear scale [B] (! x 3) 4. Remove the metal fitting [C] (! x 1), and the platen-cover arm [D]. 5. Slide the upper right cover [E] to the rear. 6. Front left cover [F] (basic model [B129]: ! x 2) or multi-function panel (other

models [B130/B168/B169]: ! x 2, » x 2) NOTE: The diagram illustrates B130.

7. Operation panel [G] (!x 4, » x 1) 8. Front right cover [H]

B130R903.WMF

[A]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[B]

EXTERIOR COVER AND OPERATION PANEL 9 March 2004

3-6

3.3.6 RIGHT DOOR

1. Open the right door [A]. 2. Release the strap [B].

3. Right door (» × 1) 3.3.7 BYPASS TRAY

1. Press the stopper rails [A] inward.

B130R904.WMF

B130R945.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

9 March 2004 EXTERIOR COVER AND OPERATION PANEL

3-7

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.3.8 PLATEN COVER SENSOR

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 2. Rear scale (☛ 3.3.5)

3. Platen cover sensor [A] (» × 1)

B130R905.WMF

[A]

SCANNER UNIT 9 March 2004

3-8

3.4 SCANNER UNIT To clean the mirrors and lenses, use a blower brush or wet cotton. 3.4.1 EXPOSURE GLASS

To clean the exposure glass, use alcohol or glass cleaner. Non-ADF machines

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 2. Scale plate (☛ 3.3.4) 3. Exposure glass [A] ADF-equipped machines

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 2. Rear scale, upper right cover

(☛ 3.3.5) 3. Exposure glass [A] Reassembling Make sure that the marking on the glass is at the rear left corner, and that the left edge of the glass is aligned flush against the support ridge [B] on the frame.

Adjustment When replacing the white plate, conduct the Scan Auto Adjustment (☛ SP4-428-001).

B130R906.WMF

[A]

[B]

9 March 2004 SCANNER UNIT

3-9

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.4.2 LENS BLOCK

CAUTION: 1) Do not disassemble the lens block. The lens block is fine adjusted before shipment.

2) Do not touch the screws on the CCD. The CCD is fine adjusted before shipment.

1. Exposure glass (☛ 3.4.1) 2. Front left cover, fax operation panel,

operation panel (☛ 3.3.5) 3. Release the cable from the four

clamps [A].

4. Lens block [B] (! × 4, 1 flat cable) NOTE: 1) Do not loosen the paint-

locked screws holding the lens unit in place.

2) After installing a new lens block, carry out copy adjustments (☛ 3.14).

3.4.3 EXPOSURE LAMP, LAMP STABILIZER BOARD

Do not fold the exposure cable on the exposure lamp.

1. Exposure glass (☛ 3.4.1) 2. Front left cover, fax operation panel

(☛ 3.3.5) 3. Slide the first scanner to a position

where the lamp and scanner are clear of the metal lids.

4. Disconnect the lamp connector [A]. 5. Remove either or both of the following:

• Exposure lamp [B] (! x 1 [C]) • Lamp stabilizer board [D] (! x 2 [E],

1 flat cable)

B130R946.WMF

B130R947.WMF

[A]

[B]

[B]

[C]

[A][D]

[E]

SCANNER UNIT 9 March 2004

3-10

3.4.4 SCANNER MOTOR

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 2. Rear scale, upper right cover (☛

3.3.5)

3. Scanner motor [A] (! × 3, 1 spring, 3 screw holders, » × 1)

NOTE: When reinstalling, fasten the

screws loosely, set the spring in place, and tighten up the screws.

3.4.5 SCANNER HP SENSOR

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 2. Left cover (☛ 3.3.5) 3. Scale plate (☛ 3.3.4) or DF rear-

lower cover [A] (! x 2)

4. Scanner HP sensor [B] (» × 1) NOTE: Move the first scanner from

the home position if you have difficulty removing the sensor.

B130R907.WMF

B130R908.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

9 March 2004 SCANNER UNIT

3-11

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.4.6 SCANNER ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 2. Rear scale, upper right cover, front left

cover, fax operation panel, operation panel (☛ 3.3.5)

3. Exposure glass (☛ 3.4.1). 4. Loosen the 2 screws holding the 1st

and 2nd scanner belts in place. 5. Slide the 1st and 2nd scanners so that all four of the following are roughly

aligned on both the front and back sides: • The hole on the copier’s lid • The hole on the 1st scanner • The corner right hole on the 2nd scanner • The hole at the base of the scanner

6. Insert the two optics adjustment tools [A], and adjust the scanners as necessary so that the tools go through all four holes.

7. Tighten the two screws that you loosened at step 2 above, so that the belts are firmly clamped into place.

8. Remove the adjustment tools.

B130R948.WMF

B130R949.WMF

[A]

FUSING 9 March 2004

3-12

3.5 FUSING 3.5.1 FUSING UNIT

!CAUTION Before handling the fusing unit, make sure that the unit is cool enough. The fusing unit can be very hot.

1. Copy tray (☛ 3.3.3) 2. Open the right door. 3. Connector cover [A] (! x 1)

NOTE: When reinstalling, attach the ground wire.

4. Fusing unit [B] (! x 2, » x 4) 3.5.2 EXIT SENSOR

1. Fusing unit (☛ 3.5.1)

2. Exit sensor [A] (» × 1)

B130R950.WMF

B130R951.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

9 March 2004 FUSING

3-13

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.5.3 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER PAWLS CAUTION: Do not damage the hot roller stripper pawls and the tension springs.

1. Fusing unit (☛ 3.5.1) 2. Separate the fusing unit into two sections: the hot roller section [A] and the

pressure roller section [B] (! x 2). NOTE: After removing the screws, lower the pressure roller section about

halfway and then slide it toward the front side to detach it. 3. Support rollers [C] 4. Hot roller stripper pawls [D] NOTE: Remove the spacer [E] if you are removing the hot roller assembly (☛

3.5.4).

B130R909.WMF

B130R910.WMF [D]

[C]

[E]

[A]

[B]

FUSING 9 March 2004

3-14

3.5.4 HOT ROLLER & FUSING LAMP CAUTION: Do not touch the fusing lamp and rollers with your bare hands.

1. Hot roller stripper pawls and spacers (☛ 3.5.3)

2. Hot roller assembly [A] (! x 2) 3. Fusing lamp [B]

NOTE: When reassembling, check that the direction of the fusing lamp is correct [C][D].

4. Hot roller [C] (2 C-rings, 1 spacer, 1

gear, 2 bushings, 1 cover [D]) Reassembling Use caution: • The fusing lamp is positioned correctly. • The fusing lamp does not touch the internal part of the hot roller.

B130R911.WMF

B130R912.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

9 March 2004 FUSING

3-15

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.5.5 THERMO-SWITCH AND THERMISTOR

1. Hot roller assembly (☛ 3.5.4) 2. Thermo-switches [A][B] (! x 2 for each) 3. Thermistor [C] (! x 1) Reassembling Make sure the following: • The thermistor is in contact with the hot roller. • The hot roller turns smoothly.

B130R913.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

FUSING 9 March 2004

3-16

3.5.6 PRESSURE ROLLER

1. Separate the fusing unit into two sections (☛ 3.5.3).

2. Fusing entrance guide [A]

3. 2 springs [B][C] 4. 2 pressure arms [D][E] 5. Bushing [F] 6. Pressure roller [G]

B130R914.WMF

B130R915.WMF

[A]

[C]

[D]

[E] [B]

[F]

[G]

9 March 2004 FUSING

3-17

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.5.7 ADJUSTING NIP BAND

You can check the nip band. By checking it, you see if the fusing unit is in a good condition�especially, if the hot roller and pressure roller are correctly installed.

1. Activate the SP mode. 2. Select SP1-109-001. 3. Specify «1.» 4. Press the OK key. 5. Press the » key. The copy mode is activated. 6. Place an OHP sheet on the by-pass tray. 7. Press the » key. The copier feeds the OHP sheet, and reserve it between the

hot roller and the pressure roller about 20 seconds. 8. Wait until the OHP sheet is output. 9. Press the # key. 10. Make sure SP1-109-001 is selected. 11. Specify «0.» 12. Press the OK key. 13. Quit the SP mode. You see an opaque stripe on the OHP sheet. This is the trace of the nip band. The normal nip band is symmetrical the OHP sheet. Both ends are slightly thicker than the center. NOTE: There is no specifications or standards for the nip band of this copier.

FUSING 9 March 2004

3-18

3.5.8 DUPLEX MOTOR

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 2. Duplex motor (» x 1, ! x 2) 3.5.9 CONTACT-RELEASE SOLENOID

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 2. High-voltage power supply board

(☛ 3.8) 3. Contact-release solenoid (1

spring, ! x 1)

B130R928.WMF

B130R929.WMF

9 March 2004 PCU AND QUENCHING LAMP

3-19

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.6 PCU AND QUENCHING LAMP When handling the photo conductor unit (PCU), use caution: • Do not touch the OPC drum with your bare hands. When OPC drum is unclean,

clean it with dry cloth, or clean it with wet cotton and wipe it with dry cloth. • Do not use alcohol any other chemicals to clean the OPC drum. These

substances damage the OPC-drum surface. • Keep PCUs in a cool, dry place. • Do not expose the OPC to any corrosive gas such as ammonia. • Do not shake a used PCU. Remaining toner and developer may spill out. • Dispose of used PCUs in accordance with local regulations. 3.6.1 PCU

1. Open the right door. NOTE: The PCU may become

stuck if you try to remove it while the front door is closed.

2. Open the front door. 3. Remove the toner bottle holder.

NOTE: Clean all spilled toner off the toner bottle area and the inside of the front door.

4. Pull out the PCU [A] (» x 1). 5. When having installed a new PCU,

remove the styrofoam and tags (☛ 1.2.2).

Initialization After you turn on the main power switch, the copier automatically initializes the new PCU. When the copier is executing initialization, use caution: • Do not turn off the main power switch. • Do not open or remove exterior covers.

B130R952.WMF

[A]

PCU AND QUENCHING LAMP 9 March 2004

3-20

3.6.2 QUENCHING LAMP

1. PCU (☛ 3.6.1)

2. Quenching lamp [A] (» × 1)

B130R953.WMF

[A]

9 March 2004 TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH

3-21

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.7 TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH

1. Toner bottle holder 2. Copy tray (☛ 3.3.3) 3. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 4. Disconnect the connector on C19

on the BICU. 5. Push the clutch coupler [A] to the

rear side, and remove the clip ring [B] from the back of the copier.

6. Coupler and spring [C] 7. Lift the toner supply clutch [D]

and remove it. NOTE: When removing, note how the wire goes through a clamp, and also

note where it passes through the rear of the machine. 3.8 HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY BOARD

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 2. High-voltage power supply board [A]

(all «‘s, ! × 4) NOTE: Remove the insulating sheet [B] if you are going to remove the contact-

release solenoid (☛ 3.5.9) or the gear cover (☛ 3.10.7).

B130R954.WMF

B130R924.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A] [B]

[C][D]

EXHAUST FAN AND MAIN MOTOR 9 March 2004

3-22

3.9 EXHAUST FAN AND MAIN MOTOR 3.9.1 EXHAUST FAN

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 2. Exhaust fan [A] (! x 2, » x 1) NOTE: When reassembling, make

sure that the arrow [B] on the frame points to the rear side. The arrow indicates the direction of airflow.

3.9.2 MAIN MOTOR

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 2. High-voltage power supply board

(☛ 3.8) 3. Ground plate [A] (! x 1) 4. Main motor with the gear cover [B]

(» x 1, ! × 7, # × 2, 2 bushings)

5. All gears [C]

6. Main motor [D] (! × 4) Reassembling Attach the main motor before attaching the gears.

B130R926.WMF

B130R917.WMF

B130R927.WMF

[A]

[B]

[B]

[A]

[C][D]

9 March 2004 PAPER FEED

3-23

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.10 PAPER FEED 3.10.1 PAPER FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD

When handling the paper tray or the paper feed roller, use caution: • Do not touch the surface of paper feed rollers. • To avoid paper jam, correctly set the side and end fences in the paper tray.

1. Paper tray 2. Shaft [A] ($ x 1) 3. Remove either or both of the following:

• Paper feed roller [B] • Friction pad [C]

3.10.2 PAPER END SENSOR

1. Paper tray 2. Open the right door. 3. PCU (☛ 3.6)

4. Paper end sensor [A] (» × 1)

B130R955.WMF

B130R956.WMF

[A][B]

[C]

[A]

PAPER FEED 9 March 2004

3-24

3.10.3 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Paper tray. 2. Open the right door. 3. Open the paper guide [A].

NOTE: Remove the paper guide (Clip x 1) if you have difficulty removing the registration sensor.

4. Registration sensor feeler [B]

5. Registration sensor [C] (» × 1) NOTE: Disconnect the connector (CN127 [D]) if you have difficulty removing

the registration sensor. 3.10.4 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR

1. Right door (☛ 3.3.6) 2. Sensor compartment [A]

3. Bypass paper end sensor [B] (» × 1)

B130R916.WMF

B130R957.WMF

B130R958.WMF

[A][B]

[C]

[D]

[B] [A]

9 March 2004 PAPER FEED

3-25

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.10.5 BYPASS FEED ROLLER

1. Right door (☛ 3.3.6) 2. Turn the feed roller housing upside

down (! × 2).

3. Feed roller shaft [B] (2 snap pawls [C], 1 spacer [D])

4. Bypass feed roller [E]

B130R959.WMF

B130R960.WMF

[A]

[E]

[B]

[D] [C]

PAPER FEED 9 March 2004

3-26

3.10.6 BYPASS FEED CLUTCH AND FRICTION PAD

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 2. Right door (☛ 3.3.6) 3. Disconnect the bypass feed clutch

connector [A] (CN93).

4. Bypass feed roller housing [B] (! × 2)

5. Bypass feed clutch [C] (# × 1) 6. Bypass friction pad [D]

B130R961.WMF

B130R962.WMF

[A]

[B] [C]

[D]

9 March 2004 PAPER FEED

3-27

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.10.7 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION CLUTCHES

1. Paper tray 2. High-voltage power supply board

(☛ 3.8) 3. Ground plate [A] (! x 1)

4. Gear cover [B] (» x 1, ! × 7, # × 2, 2 bushings) NOTE: Do not remove the main

motor from the gear cover.

5. Ground plate [C] (! x 1) 6. Slowly push the clutch holder [D]

and remove the registration clutch [E] ($ x 1, » x 1).

7. Paper feed clutch [F]

B130R917.WMF

B130R918.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C] [D] [E]

[F]

IMAGE TRANSFER 9 March 2004

3-28

3.11 IMAGE TRANSFER 3.11.1 TRANSFER ROLLER

CAUTION: 1) Do not touch the transfer roller with your bare hands. 2) Do not scratch the transfer roller. The transfer roller is damaged.

1. Right door (☛ 3.3.6) 2. Raise the levers [A][B] at the ends

of the image transfer roller. 3. Release the image transfer roller

[C]. NOTE: When reassembling, make

sure that the springs [D] are in the original positions.

3.11.2 ID SENSOR AND DUPLEX ROLLER

1. Right door (☛ 3.3.6) 2. Lower guide [A] 3. Idle roller holders [B][C] 4. Idle roller [D] 5. Roller guide [E] 6. Transfer unit [F] 7. One-way gear [G] (# x 1) 8. Duplex roller [H] (# x 1, 3

bushings)

B130R930.WMF

B130R919.WMF

[C] [A]

[B]

[D]

[A] [B]

[C]

[D][E]

[F] [G]

[H]

9 March 2004 IMAGE TRANSFER

3-29

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

9. ID sensor [A] (» × 1) 3.11.3 DISCHARGE PLATE

1. Right door (☛ 3.3.6) 2. Discharge plate [A].

B130R931.WMF

B130R932.WMF

[A]

[A]

CONTROLLER BOX AND BICU 9 March 2004

3-30

3.12 CONTROLLER BOX AND BICU Note that the basic model (B129) and other models (B130, B168, B169) have different components. The table lists the components and necessary maintenance work.

Model BICU NVRAM

Controller Box

Controller NVRAM Maintenance Work

Basic Installed None None Save the data from the NVRAM to a memory card before replacing the NVRAM.

Others None Installed Installed Save the data from the NVRAM to an SD card before replacing the NVRAM.

1. When you are going to replace the NVRAM, save the NVRAM data. • From the BICU NVRAM to a memory card (☛ 5.1.9) • From the controller NVRAM to an SD card (☛ 5.2.3)

2. Rear cover (☛ 3.3.2) 3. BICU cover [A] (basic model [B129]: ! x 3) or controller box [B] (other models

[B130/B168/B169]: » x 1, ! x 5)

B130R921.WMF

B130R933.WMF

[A] [B]

9 March 2004 CONTROLLER BOX AND BICU

3-31

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

NOTE: 1) When replacing the controller board,

remove the NVRAM [A] from the old controller board. Install the NVRAM to the new controller board.

2) Do not change the dipswitch settings.

4. Ground plate [B] (! x 2) 5. BICU [C] (all «‘s, 2 flat cables, !

x 6) NOTE: The basic model has an

NVRAM on the BICU. When replacing the BICU, remove the NVRAM [D] from the board. Install the NVRAM to the new board.

6. When you have replaced the NVRAM, copy the saved data to the NVRAM. • From a memory card to the NVRAM (☛ 5.1.9) • From an SD card to the NVRAM (☛ 5.2.3)

B130R942.WMF

B130R920.WMF [D]

[C]

[A]

[B]

LASER UNIT 9 March 2004

3-32

3.13 LASER UNIT

!WARNING Turn off the main power switch and unplug the copier before starting replacement. The laser beam can damage your eyes severely.

CAUTION: 1) Do not touch the screws on the LD board on the LD unit. Do not try to adjust any part of the LD unit. The LD unit is fine adjusted before shipment.

2) Do not touch the polygon mirror, shield glass, or lenses with your bare hands.

3.13.1 LOCATION OF CAUTION DECAL

B130R963.WMF B130R934.WMF

9 March 2004 LASER UNIT

3-33

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.13.2 PSU

1. Open the front door. 2. Copy tray (☛ 3.3.3) 3. PSU assembly [A] (» x 4, ! x

4. PSU [B] (» x 1, ! x 6)

NOTE: The North America models does not have the connector.

B130R923.WMF

B130R925.WMF

[B]

[A]

LASER UNIT 9 March 2004

3-34

3.13.3 LASER UNIT

1. PSU (☛ 3.13.2) 2. Toner bottle holder 3. Laser unit [A] (! x 3, » x 2) NOTE: When reassembling, make sure

that the cable [B] passes under the unit.

3.13.4 LD UNIT AND POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR

1. Laser unit (☛ 3.13.3) 2. Laser unit cover [A] (! x 2, 1

grounding plate) 3. LD unit [B] (! x 2) 4. Polygon mirror motor [C] (! x 4) Reassembling Check that the polygon mirror and toroidal lens are clean. Dust or other foreign substances may interfere with the operation of the LD unit.

B130R964.WMF

B130R965.WMF

B130R966.WMF

[A]

[B]

[B] [A]

[C]

9 March 2004 ADJUSTING COPY IMAGE AREA

3-35

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.14 ADJUSTING COPY IMAGE AREA Adjust the copy image area under any of the following conditions: • You have cleared engine data (SP5-801-002 or SP5-998-001). • You have replaced any of the following components:

• First scanner or second scanner • Lens block • Scanner motor • Polygon mirror motor • Paper tray

3.14.1 PRINTING

Make sure that the paper is correctly loaded in each paper tray before starting the adjustment procedure in this section. Adjusting Registration Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP5-902-001 > 10) for this adjustment.

1. Print out the test pattern with the paper fed from the regular paper tray.

2. Print out the test pattern with the paper fed from the by-pass tray.

3. Print out the test pattern by selecting duplex printing.

4. Measure the distance between the leading edge of the image area and the leading edge of the paper [A]. NOTE: The diagram shows the paper on the copy tray. Note that the paper is

output with the face down. 5. Adjust the leading edge registration

(SP1-001). 6. Measure the distance between the

side edge of the image area and the side edge of the paper [B].

7. Adjust the side-to-side registration (SP1-002).

8. Specify «0» (zero) in SP5-902-001 after finishing the adjustment procedure.

B130R935.WMF

SP Specification SP1-001-001 (All Trays) 0 ± 2 mm SP1-001-002 (By-pass) 0 ± 2 mm SP1-001-003 (Duplex) 0 ± 4 mm

SP SpecificationSP1-002-001 (1st tray) 0 ± 2 mm SP1-002-002 (2nd tray) 0 ± 2 mm SP1-002-005 (By-pass) 0 ± 4 mm SP1-002-006 (Duplex) 0 ± 4 mm

[A]

[B]

ADJUSTING COPY IMAGE AREA 9 March 2004

3-36

Adjusting Blank Margin Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP5-902-001 > 10) for this adjustment.

1. Print out the test pattern. 2. Measure the distance between the four

edges of the image area and the four edges of the paper [A][B][C][D]. NOTE: The diagram shows the paper

on the copy tray. Note that the paper is output with the face down.

3. Adjust the blank margin (SP2-101). SP Specification

SP2-101-001 (Leading Edge) [A] 2 ± 1.5 mm SP2-101-002 (Trailing Edge) [B] 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm SP2-101-003 (Left Side) [C] 2 ± 1.5 mm SP2-101-004 (Right Side) [D] 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm

NOTE: The «Left Side» and «Right Side» comes to your left-hand side and right-hand side respectively when you view the copied image with the leading edge upwards.

4. Specify «0» (zero) in SP5-902-001 after finishing the adjustment procedure. Adjusting Main-Scan Magnification Use the Grid Pattern (Single Dot) (SP5-902-001 > 5) for this adjustment.

1. Print out the test pattern. 2. Measure the sides of squares. Each side should be 2.7-mm long.) 3. Adjust the main-scan

magnification (SP2-998-001: Main Mag-print).

4. Specify «0» (zero) in SP5-902-001 after finishing the adjustment procedure.

B130R936.WMF

SP SpecificationSP2-998-001 (Main Mag-print) 100 ± 1%

[A] [B]

[C]

[D]

9 March 2004 ADJUSTING COPY IMAGE AREA

3-37

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.14.2 SCANNING

Before adjusting scanning, adjust printing (☛ 3.14.1). To adjust scanning, use the A4 test chart. Adjusting Registration

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass. Make sure that the test chart is aligned with the rear and left scales on the exposure glass.

2. Make a copy. 3. Measure the distance between the

leading edge of the image area and the leading edge of the paper [A]. NOTE: The diagram shows the paper

on the copy tray. Note that the paper is output with the face down. 4. Adjust the leading-edge scan

registration. (SP4-010-001). 5. Measure the distance between the side edge of the image area and the side

edge of the paper [B]. 6. Adjust the side-to-side registration (SP4-011-001). Adjusting Magnification

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass. Make sure the test chart is aligned with the rear and left scales on the exposure glass.

2. Make a copy. 3. Compare the copy with the original. 4. Adjust the main-scan and sub-scan

magnifications. The original image [A] is magnified in the main-scan direction [B] or in the sub-scan direction [C] when you specify a larger value.

B130R935.WMF

SP Specification SP4-010-001 (LE Scan Regist) 0 ± 2 mm

SP Specification SP4-011-001 (S-to-S Scan Regist) 0 ± 2 mm

B130R938.WMF

B130R939.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]

ADJUSTING COPY IMAGE AREA 9 March 2004

3-38

NOTE: The diagrams show the paper on the copy tray. Note that the paper is output with the face down.

Standard White Density Adjustment This procedure adjusts the standard white density level. Adjust the standard white density after any of the following maintenance work:

• Replacing the standard white plate • Replacing the BICU • Replacing the lens block • Executing the memory clear (SP5-801-002 [basic model], SP5-998-001

[other models]). 1. Place 10 sheets of new A4 paper on the exposure glass. 2. Close the platen cover. 3. Activate the SP mode. 4. Select Copy SP4-908. 5. Specify «1» and press the OK key. The copier automatically adjusts the

standard white density.

B130R940.WMF

SP Specification SP4-009-001

(Main Scan Mag) ± 1.0%

SP4-008-001 (Sub Scan Mag) ± 1.0%

[C]

9 March 2004 ADJUSTING COPY IMAGE AREA

3-39

Rep

lace

men

tA

djus

tmen

t

3.14.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

Perform the adjustment procedure in this section only when the ADF is installed to the copier.

1. Make a temporary test chart [A] as shown in the diagram. Use the A4/8.5 x 11″ paper to make it.

2. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF. 3. Make a copy. 4. Measure the distance between the side edge

of the image area and the side edge of the paper [A]. NOTE: The diagram shows the paper on the

copy tray. Note that the paper is output with the face down.

5. Adjust the side-to-side registration (S to S/Front Regist: SP6-006-001). The image area moves to the rear side of the copier when you specify a larger value.

6. Measure the distance between the leading of the image area and the leading edge of the paper [B].

7. Adjust the leading edge registration (Leading Regist: SP6-006-002). The image area moves to the right side of the copier when you specify a larger value.

8. Measure the distance between the trailing edge of the image area and the trailing edge of the paper [C].

9. Adjust the erased area on the trailing edge (Trailing Erase: SP6-006-003). 10. Compare the copy with the original.

11. Adjust the sub-scan magnification (SP6-006-005). The specification is ±1.0%.

B130R967.WMF

B130R941.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

9 March 2004 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4-1

Trou

ble-

shoo

ting

4. TROUBLESHOOTING 4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 4.1.1 SUMMARY

There are four levels of service call conditions.

Level Definition Reset Procedure

A To prevent possible damage, the machine does not operate until the service representative resets the SC code.

Activate the SP mode, and turn the main power switch off and on.

B Turning the main power stitch off and on resets the SC code if the error is caused by incorrect sensor detection.

Turn the main power switch off and on.

C The machine operates as usual excluding the unit related to the service call.

Turn the main power switch off and on.

D The SC history is updated. The machine operates as usual.

No SC code is displayed. Only the SC history is updated.

NOTE: 1) If a problem involves circuit boards, see if you can solve the problem by disconnecting and reconnecting all connectors before deciding to replace a circuit board.

2) If a problem involves a motor lock, check the mechanical load before deciding to replace a motor or sensor.

3) If working on a fax-equipped machine, switching power off and on may cause loss of data stored in the memory.

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 9 March 2004

4-2

4.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS No.

Definition Symptom Possible Cause

Exposure Lamp Error 101 B The scanner has scanned the white plate, but cannot detect the white level.

• Defective exposure lamp • Defective exposure lamp stabilizer • Defective exposure lamp connector • Unclean scanner mirror • Scanner mirror out of position • Defective SBU board • Defective SBU connector • Lens block out of position • Incorrect position or width of white

plate scanning (☛ SP4-015) Scanner home position error 1 120 B The scanner home position sensor does not detect the scanner leaving the home position.

• Defective scanner home position sensor

• Defective scanner drive motor • Defective scanner home position

sensor connector • Defective scanner drive motor

connector • Defective BICU board

Scanner home position error 2 121 B The scanner home position sensor does not detect the scanner coming back to the home position.

• Defective scanner home position sensor

• Defective scanner drive motor • Defective scanner home position

sensor connector • Defective scanner drive motor

connector • Defective BICU board

SBU white/black level correction error 143 D The automatic SBU adjustment has failed to correct the black level. The automatic SBU adjustment has failed to correct the white level twenty times consecutively.

• Defective exposure lamp • Unclean white plate • Incorrect position or width of white

plate scanning (☛ SP4-015) • Defective BICU board • Defective SBU board

Communication Error between BICU and SBU 144 B The BICU cannot correctly establish communication with the SBU.

• Loose connection of the flat cable between the BICU and the SBU

• Defective flat cable between the BICU and the SBU

• Defective BICU • Defective SBU

9 March 2004 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4-3

Trou

ble-

shoo

ting

No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause

Automatic SBU adjustment error 145 D The white levels of the white plate and the white paper are extraordinarily different during the Scan Auto Adjustment (☛SP4-428-001).

• Defective exposure lamp • Unclean white plate • Incorrect position or width of white

plate scanning (☛ SP4-015) • Defective BICU board • Defective SBU board

Image transfer error 193 B Scanned images are not transferred to the controller memory within one minute.

• Defective BICU board • Defective controller board

Memory address error 198 B The BICU does not receive the memory address report from the controller within one minute.

• Inconsistency between the BICU firmware and the controller firmware

• Defective BICU • Defective controller

Charge roller current leak 302 B The polling module detects a current leak of the charge roller.

• Defective charge roller • Defective high voltage supply board • Loose connection of the PCU

Polygonal mirror motor error 320 B The polygon mirror motor does not reach the operating speed within 10 seconds. Or, the polygon mirror motor remains out of the operating speed for 0.2 second after reaching the operating speed.

• Defective polygon mirror motor • Loose connection between the

polygonal mirror motor and the BICU • Defective cable between the BICU

and the polygon mirror motor • Defective BICU

No laser writing signal (F-GATE) error 321 B The poling module does not detect the laser writing signal (F-GATE) asserting after the laser crosses 5 mm from the start point on the drum surface.

• Defective BICU • Loose connection on the fax controller

or the printer controller • Defective fax controller or printer

controller Laser synchronization error 322 B The main scan synchronization detector does not detect the laser signal for 0.5 second.

• Toner bottle not installed • Loose connection between the LD

unit and the BICU • Defective cable between the BICU

and LD unit • LD unit out of position • Defective LD unit • Defective BICU

TD sensor error 390 B The BICU detects the TD sensor outputting extraordinary voltage (less than 0.2 V or more than 4.0 V) 10 times consecutively.

• Defective TD sensor • Loose connection of the PCU

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 9 March 2004

4-4

No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause

Development bias leak 391 B The polling module detects a current leak of the development bias.

• Loose connection of the PCU • Defective high voltage supply board

Developer initialization error 392 B The ID sensor does not detect a correct pattern during developer initialization (☛ 2-214-001).

• Defective ID sensor • Insufficient developer • Defective drum operation • Defective development roller

operation • Loose connection of the PCU • Insufficient voltage for the charge

roller Transfer roller leak error (positive electrode) 401 B The feedback voltage of the transfer roller is insufficient.

• Defective high voltage supply board • Loose connection of the PCU • Incorrect installation of the transfer

unit or the separation unit • Defective transfer roller

Transfer roller leak error (negative elecrode) 402 B The feedback voltage of the transfer roller is insufficient.

• Defective high voltage supply board • Loose connection of the PCU • Incorrect installation of the transfer

unit or the separation unit • Defective transfer roller

Main motor error 500 B The main motor does not reach its operation speed within 0.7 second. Or, the main motor remains out of its operation speed for 0.7 second after reaching the operation speed.

• Overload • Defective main motor

Fusing thermistor open error 541 A The fusing temperature remains lower than the specified temperature by 20 degrees Celsius.

• Defective thermistor • Incorrect installation of the thermistor • Defective power supply unit • Loose connectors

Fusing temperature warm-up error 542 A The fusing temperature rises 7 degrees or less in two seconds; and this continues 5 times consecutively. Or, the fusing temperature is not detected within 25 or 35 seconds.

• Defective thermistor • Incorrect installation of the thermistor • Defective fusing lamp • Defective power supply unit

Fusing overheat error 1 543 A The fusing temperature detected by the thermistor is 230°C or higher for one second.

• Defective thermistor • Defective power supply unit

Fusing overheat error 2 544 A The fusing temperature detected by the monitor circuit is 250°C or higher for one second.

• Defective thermistor • Defective power supply unit

9 March 2004 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4-5

Trou

ble-

shoo

ting

No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause

Fusing lamp overheat error 545 A After the fusing temperature reaches the target, the fusing lamp remains on for 12 seconds.

• Defective thermistor • Incorrect installation of the thermistor • Defective power supply unit

Unstable fusing temperature 546 A While the fusing lamp is on, the fusing temperature varies 50°C or more within one second; and this occurs two consecutive times.

• Defective thermistor • Incorrect installation of the thermistor • Defective power supply unit

Zero cross signal malfunction 547 B The zero cross signal is not detected within five seconds after the main power switch is turned on. Or, the zero cross signal is not detected within one second after operation begins.

• Defective power supply unit • Defective BICU

Exhaust fan motor error 590 B The exhaust fan motor is locked for five seconds.

• Loose connection of the exhaust fan motor

• Overload CSS communication error 630 D An error occurs while the copier is trying to communicate with the CSS.

• Communication error in the public line

Accounting error 1 632 C An error occurs during communication with the MF accounting device.

• Defective accounting device • Loose connection

Accounting error 2 633 C After the controller establishes communication with the MF accounting device, the MF accounting device sends a brake signal.

• Defective accounting device • Loose connection

Accounting RAM error 634 C An error occurs in the backup RAM for the MF accounting device.

• Defective accounting device

Accounting battery error 635 B An error occurs in the battery of the MF accounting device.

• Defective accounting device

Engine start error 670 B The controller does not receive all or some of the BICU signals within 70 seconds during startup; or the controller detects the BICU stopping unexpectedly.

• Defective BICU • Defective controller • Loose connection

ADF gate error 1 760 B The ADF sends the FGATE signal before it is requested to scan originals.

• Defective ADF board • Defective input/output board • Loose connection

ADF gate abnormal 2 761 B The ADF does not send the FGATE signal within 30 seconds after the ADF starts scanning.

• Defective ADF connector • Defective SBU board

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 9 March 2004

4-6

No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause

ADF gate abnormal 3 762 B The ADF continues to send the FGATE signal for more than 60 seconds after the ADF starts scanning.

• Defective ADF connector • Defective SBU board

Video transfer error 1 800 B The BICU does not report the video transfer completion within the specified time.

• Defective controller

Video transfer error 2 804 B The scanner does not report the video transfer completion within the specified time.

• Defective controller

Watchdog error 818 B Some data path is exclusively held or some eternal loop occurs; no other process can run.

• Defective controller • Defective firmware • Defective optional unit

Kernel error 819 B An error occurs in the kernel. • Defective controller

• Defective firmware Self-diagnostic error: CPU 820 B • An unexpected exception or interruption occurs during the self-diagnostic test.

• An error is detected in the MBU.

• Defective controller • Defective firmware • Loose MBU jumper (☛ Fax Service

Manual 2.2.3) Self-diagnostic error: ASIC 821 B The ASIC returns an error during the self-diagnostic test.

• Defective controller

Self-diagnostic error: Network interface 823 C The network interface board returns an error during the self-diagnostic test.

• Defective network interface board • Defective controller

Self-diagnostic error: NVRAM 824 B The resident NVRAM returns an error during the self-diagnostic test.

• Defective NVRAM on the controller • Defective controller board

Self-diagnostic error: RTC/Optional NVRAM 826 B The RTC returns an error or the controller does not detect the RTC during the self-diagnostic test.

• Defective controller

Self-diagnostic error: RAM 827 B An error is detected in the resident RAM during the self-diagnostic test.

• Defective firmware • Defective controller

Self-diagnostic error: ROM 828 B An error is detected in the resident ROM during the self-diagnostic test.

• Defective controller • Defective firmware

Self-diagnostic error: Optional RAM 829 C An error is detected in the optional RAM during the self-diagnostic test.

• Defective optional RAM • Defective controller

Self-diagnostic error: Clock Generator 838 B An error is detected in the clock generator during the self-diagnostic test.

• Defective controller

9 March 2004 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4-7

Trou

ble-

shoo

ting

No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause

Network I/F error 850 C The network address is not correct, or an error occurs in the NIB.

• Defective NIB • Defective controller

IEEE 1394 I/F error 851 C An error occurs in the driver. • Defective IEEE 1394 interface board

• Defective controller IEEE 802.11b/Bluetooth card error (startup) 853 C The controller can access the wireless LAN/Bluetooth board, but cannot access the wireless LAN/Bluetooth card during startup.

• Loose connection • Defective wireless LAN/Bluetooth

card • Defective controller

IEEE 802.11b/Bluetooth card error (during operation) 854 C The controller can access the wireless LAN/Bluetooth board, but cannot access the wireless LAN/Bluetooth card during startup.

• Loose connection • Defective wireless LAN/Bluetooth

card • Defective controller

IEEE 802.11b/Bluetooth card error 855 C An error is detected in the wireless LAN/Bluetooth card.

• Loose connection • Defective wireless LAN/Bluetooth

card • Defective controller

IEEE 802.11b/Bluetooth interface board error 856 C An error is detected in the wireless LAN/Bluetooth interface board.

• Loose connection • Defective wireless LAN/Bluetooth

interface board • Defective controller

USB I/F error 857 C An error occurs in the driver. • Loose connection

• Defective controller SD card authentication error 866 C The SD card does not contain a correct license code.

• Data corruption

SD card access error 1 867 B The SD card is removed from the slot during operation.

• Loose connection

SD card access error 2 868 B An error is detected in the SD card. • /Bluetooth SD card

• /Bluetooth SD controller Address book data error 870 C An error is detected in the address book data.

• Data corruption • Defective firmware

Flash ROM error 871 C An error is detected in the address book stored in the flash ROM.

• Defective flash ROM device • Defective flash ROM

Electrical total counter error 900 B The electrical total counter contains incorrect data.

• Defective NVRAM on the controller

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 9 March 2004

4-8

No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause

Mechanical total counter error 901 B The polling module does not detect the mechanical total counter.

• Defective mechanical total counter • Defective BICU • Loose connection

Engine total counter error 903 B The checksum of the total counter is not correct.

• Defective NVRAM on the BICU

Printer error 920 C A fatal error is detected in the printer application program

• Defective printer application program • Incorrect hardware configuration

(including memory shortage) Printer font error 921 C Necessary font files are not found in the SD card.

• Necessary font files not installed • Data corruption • Defective controller

Net file error 925 C The net-file management-file contains a fatal error.

• Data corruption • Defective firmware • Defective controller

Memory error 928 B An error occurs during the memory check conducted when the main power switch is turned on or when the copier is recovering from the energy saver mode.

• Defective memory • Defective BICU • Loose connection between the BICU

and the memory

IMAC hardware error 929 B A memory control job is not completed within a certain period.

• Defective IMAC • Defective BICU • Loose connection

Printer application program error 954 B The printer application program does not become ready when the printer application program is necessary.

• Defective application program

Image transfer error 955 B The BICU requests the controller to transfer image data; but the controller does not become ready.

• Defective application program

Status error (laser optics housing unit) 964 B The optics-housing unit does not become ready within 17 seconds after a request.

• Defective software

9 March 2004 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4-9

Trou

ble-

shoo

ting

No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause

Controller-engine inconsistency 980 B The controller is incompatible with the engine.

• One of the following controllers is installed to the basic model: — The controller of the MFP model — The controller of the copier/facsimile model — The controller of the printer/scanner/copier model

• The controller of the optional printer/scanner is installed to one of the following models: — The MFP model — The copier/facsimile model — The printer/scanner/copier model

NVRAM error 981 B An error occurs during engine NVRAM check.

• Defective NVRAM • Loose connection between the BICU

and the NVRAM • Incorrect installation of the NVRAM • Defective BICU

Localization error 982 B The localization information in the nonvolatile ROM and in the NVRAM is different (☛ SP5-807-001).

• Localization setting not specified (The main power switch is turned on for the first time after the NVRAM is replaced.)

• Incorrect localization setting • Defective NVRAM

Print image transfer error 984 B Print images are not transferred. • Defective controller

• Defective BICU • Loose connection between the

controller and the BICU Unrecoverable software error 990 B A software program acts unexpectedly. • Defective firmware

• Incorrect internal parameter • Insufficient working memory NOTE: The file name, address, and data are stored in the NVRAM. You can view the information (☛ SP7-403).

Recoverable software error 991 D A software program acts unexpectedly; the program can continue normal processing.

• Incorrect internal parameter • Insufficient working memory

Unexpected Software Error 992 B An undefined error occurs. • Defective firmware Application function error 997 C The application program does not respond or does not start correctly.

• Defective firmware

Application start error 998 B No application program starts within 60 seconds after the main power switch is turned on

• Defective firmware • Necessary resource not found

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 9 March 2004

4-10

No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause

Program download error 999 B An error occurs during program download from an IC card.

• Incorrect installation of a PCB • Defective BICU • Defective controller • Defective IC card • Defective NVRAM • Power failure NOTE: SC999 is not logged. Once downloading fails, you may be unable to retry it. In a case like this, you must replace the related PCB.

9 March 2004 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4-11

Trou

ble-

shoo

ting

4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS 4.2.1 SENSOR/SWITCH OPEN ERRORS

Sensor Connector Message Remarks CN127 Registration

Sensor SN Paper jam

CN129 Paper End Sensor SN

Load paper

CN130 Bypass Paper End Sensor SN

Load paper The red LED in the fax key lights when the application program tries to print out a document.

CN137 Paper Path Sensor SN

Paper jam

CN128 Exit Sensor SN

Paper jam

CN132 Image Density (ID) Sensor SN

(None) Print quality may become worse.

CN123 SC901 The connector is shared with the mechanical total counter.

Toner Density (TD) Sensor

PCU Reset PCU correctly CN126 SC120 Scanner HP

Sensor Sensor SC120 CN126 SC120 Platen Cover

Sensor SN (None) The copier does not warm up when you open the platen cover.

DF CN305 Cover open ADF Guide Open Sensor SN Cover open

DF CN305 Cover open ADF Original Set Sensor Sensor (None) Originals are not detected.

DF CN305 Cover Open ADF Registration Sensor SN Paper jam Originals are correctly

transported. CN114 Right door open Front Door Switch

SW Front/Right door open The message depends on which circuit is open (white → front; blue → right).

CN114 Right door open Right Door Switch SW Right door open

CNxxx: The connector on the BICU board. DF CNxxx: The connector on the ADF connection board. SN: The connector on the sensor. SW: The connector on the switch. PCU: The connector on the PCU.

LED DISPLAY 9 March 2004

4-12

4.2.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

All of these fuses are on the power supply unit. Rating Fuse

120 V 220 � 240 V At main switch ON

FU1 15A/125V 8A/250 V No response FU2 6.3A/250V 3.15A/250V No response

4.3 LED DISPLAY 4.3.1 BICU

Number Function LED 2 LED 2 blinks in normal operation.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-1

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5. SERVICE TABLES 5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM !!!!IMPORTANT Do not let the user access the SP mode or the SSP mode. Only service representatives are allowed to access these modes. The machine operation is NOT guaranteed after any person other than service representatives accesses the SP mode or the SSP mode.

5.1.1 USING SP AND SSP MODES

The following two modes are available: • SP Mode (Service Program Mode): The SP Mode includes the programs that

are necessary for standard maintenance work. • SSP Mode (Special SP Mode): The SSP Mode includes SP-Mode programs

and some special programs. You need some extra knowledge to use these special programs. For details, consult your supervisor.

Starting SP Mode

1. Type the keys as follows: » → # → $ → % 2. Press the & key and hold it down until the SP-mode menu is displayed (about

3 seconds).

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

B130S903.WMF

[A] [B] [C] [D]

! «/OK

[F] [E]

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-2

Starting SSP Mode The SSP mode is not available to the basic model (the machine without the controller box).

1. Type the keys as follows: » → # → $ → % 2. Press the & key and hold it down until the SP-mode menu is displayed (about

3 seconds). 3. Press the ‘ key and hold it down. 4. While holding down the ‘ key, press the # key (on the numeric keypad). 5. While holding down the ‘ key, press the �OK� key. Selecting Programs • When a blinking underscore (or several blinking underscores) is displayed, you

can type a number from the numeric keypad [D]. • When the sign �! «/OK� [A] is displayed upper right corner, you can scroll

through the menu by pressing the left-arrow key [B] or the right-arrow key [C]. To select a program, press the OK key [F].

Specifying Values

1. After locating a program, press the OK key. A blinking underscore (or several blinking underscores) indicates which value you can change. The value in parentheses is the default value of the menu.

2. Type a necessary value from the numeric keypad. To switch between positive (plus) and negative (minus) values, press the # key.

3. To validate the value, press the OK key. To cancel the value, press the cancel key [E].

Activating Copy Mode You can activate the copy mode while the SP mode is running. When you do so, the copier outputs images or patterns that help you adjust the SP setting.

1. Press the ( key. The copy mode is activated. 2. Specify copy settings and press the ( key. 3. To return to the SP mode, press the » key.

NOTE: You cannot end the SP mode while the copy mode is activated. Quitting Programs/Ending (S)SP Mode Press the » key or the cancel key to quit the program. You can end the SP mode by pressing one of these keys several times.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-3

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5.1.2 SP MODE TABLES�BASIC MODEL

The tables in this section (5.1.2) list the service programs (SPs) that are available when the controller box is NOT installed. For the SPs that are available with the controller box, see the next section (5.1.3).

Keys in the tables: • Asterisk (*): The settings are saved in the NVRAM. Most of them return to the

default values when you execute SP5-801-002 (☛5.1.5). • DFU: The program is for the design/factory use only. Do not change the settings. • Brackets ([ ]): The brackets enclose the setting rage, default value, and minimum

step with unit ([Minimum ∼ Maximum / Default / Step]). SP1-XXX (Feed)

1001* Leading Edge Registration [�9.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 1001 1 All Trays 1001 2 By-pass 1001 3 Duplex

Adjusts the leading-edge registration (☛ 3.14).

1002* Side-to-Side Registration [�9.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

1002 1 1st Tray 1002 2 Optional Tray 1002 5 By-pass

Adjusts the side-to-side registration (☛ 3.14). SP1-002-001 is applied to all trays. SP1-002-002 and 005 adjusts the difference from SP1-002-001.

1002 6 Duplex Adjusts the side-to-side registration of the 2nd side in duplex copying. The 1st side is adjusted by SP1-002-001 through 005.

1003* Paper Feed Timing Adjusts the amount of paper buckle on the

registration roller. 1003 1 1st tray [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 mm/step] 1003 3 Optional tray [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 mm/step] 1003 4 By-pass feed [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 mm/step] 1003 5 Duplex [0 ~ 20 / 5 / 1 mm/step]

1103* Fusing Idling [0 = No / 1 = Yes]

1103 1 Enables or disables the contact-release control. The table below lists the results.

Setting 0 = No 1 = Yes C-R control Works Does not work Idling time Shorter Longer Fusing quality Lower Higher

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-4

Fusing Temperature Adjustment 1105* Adjusts the target fusing temperature. Note that the thermistor is at the center of the hot roller.

1105 1 Warm Up-Center [140 ~ 180 / 160 / 1°C/step] 1105 3 Standby-Center [140 ~ 160 / 150 / 1°C/step] 1105 5 Copying-Center [140 ~ 180 / 160 / 1°C/step] 1105 7 Low Level 2-Center [0 ~ 80 / 60 / 1°C/step] 1105 9 Thick-Center [140 ~ 185 / 165 / 1°C/step]

1106 Display Fusing

1106 1 Displays the fusing temperature.

Fusing Soft Start DFU 1107* Adjusts the number of zero-cross cycles of the fusing lamp AC supply needed to bring the fusing lamp power to 100% while bringing the lamp up to the standby temperature or while copying. Increase this value if the machine is experiencing sudden power dropouts.

1107 1 Warm Up Soft Start [0 = 10 cycles / 1 = 20 cycles / 2 = 50 cycles] 1107 2 Other Soft Start [0 = 10 cycles / 1 = 20 cycles / 2 = 50 cycles / 3 = 1 cycle] 1107 3 Soft Stop Setting [0: No / 1: Yes]

1108* Set-Fusing Start [0 = 1s / 1 = 1.5s / 2 = 2s]

1108 1 Specifies the interval for fusing-temperature control.

1109 Nip Band Check

1109 1 Conducts the nip band check (☛ 3.5.7).

1110* Fan Control Timer [30 ~ 60 / 30 / 1 s/step]

1110 1 Specifies the fan control time. The fan motor keeps its operating speed for the specified time before changing the speed or stopping. The fan control timer prevents the exhaust fan from suddenly stopping. This function protects the copier from overheating.

1902 Display-AC Frequency

1902 1 Displays the fusing lamp power control frequency (as detected by the zero cross signal generator). The displayed value is 1/5 the actual frequency: 10 and lower = 50 Hz, 11 and higher = 60 Hz.

1911* By-pass Envelope [0 = Disabled / 1= Enabled]

1911 1 The program dedicated to envelope printing runs when you enable this program (SP1-911-001) and you select �Thick Paper� as the paper type of the by-pass tray ($ > System Settings > Tray Paper Settings > Paper Type: Bypass Tray).

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-5

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

SP2-XXX (Drum) 2001* Charge Roller Bias Adjustment

Printing [�2100 ~ �1500 / �1650 / 1 V/step] 2001 1 Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for printing. The voltage changes automatically as charge-roller voltage control works. The value here is the base value for the charge-roller voltage control. ID sensor pattern [0 ~ 400 / 300 / 1 V/step] 2001 2 Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for the ID sensor pattern (as part of charge-roller voltage correction). The charge-roller voltage is obtained by adding SP2-001-002 to the value of SP2-001-001.

2101* Erase Margin Adjustment Adjusts the width of the erased area (☛ 3.14).

2101 1 Leading edge [0.0 ~ 9.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Specification: 2 ± 1.5 mm

Trailing [0.0 ~ 9.0 / 4.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Specification: 2 +2.5/�1.5 mm

2101 2

The rear trailing edge is this value plus 1.2 mm. Left side [0.0 ~ 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

Specification: 2 ± 1.5 mm 2101 3

The rear left edge is this value plus 0.3 mm. Right side [0.0 ~ 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

Specification: 2 +2.5/�1.5 mm 2101 4

The rear right edge is this value plus 0.3 mm.

2201* Development Bias Adjustment

Printing [�1500 ~ �200 / �650 / 1 V/step] 2201 1 Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller for printing. Image density becomes higher when you specify a smaller value (a greater absolute value). Image density becomes lower when you specify a greater value (a smaller absolute value).ID sensor pattern [�2 = LL (220 V) / -1 = L (260 V) / 0 = N (300 V) / 1 =

H (340 V) / 2 = HH (380 V)] 2201 2

Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller for the ID sensor pattern. The voltage applied is obtained by adding SP2-201-002 to SP2-201-1. The setting affects ID sensor pattern density, which in turn affects the toner supply.

2213* Outputs after Near End

2213 1 [0 = 50 pages / 1 = 20 pages] Sets the number of copy/print/fax pages that can be made after toner near-end has been detected. Reduce the number of pages if the user normally makes copies with a high image ratio.

2214 Developer Initialization

2214 1 Initializes the TD sensor toner supply target voltage and the TD sensor gain value. Execute this SP replacing the developer or the TD sensor.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-6

2220 TD Sensor Output Value Display

2220 1 Displays: a) Vt: the current TD sensor output value and b) Vref: the target TD output value Vts (SP2-926) + correction for ID sensor

output. The TD sensor output value changes every copy. If a > b, toner is supplied to the development unit.

2221 ID Sensor Error Analysis (☛ 5.1.4)

2221 1 Vsg Displays the Vsg value. 2221 2 Vsp Displays the Vsp value. 2221 3 PWM Displays the PWM value. 2221 4 Vsdp Displays the Vsdp value. 2221 5 Vt Displays the Vt value. 2221 6 Vts Displays the Vts value.

2301* Transfer Current Adjustment (☛ 6.6).

Normal paper [�2 = �4 µA / �1 = �2 µA / 0 = 0 µµµµA / 1 = 2 µA / 2 = +4 µA]

2301 1

Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when feeding from a paper tray. Use a high setting if the user normally feeds relatively thick paper (within spec) from a paper tray Thick/Special paper [�2 = �4 µA / �1 = �2 µA / 0 = 0 µµµµA / 1 = 2 µA / 2 =

+4 µA] 2301 2

Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when feeding from the by-pass tray. Use a high setting (a) if the user normally feeds relatively thick paper from the by-pass tray, or (b) if waste toner is re-attracted from the drum (which can occur when using transparencies). Duplex [�2 = �4 µA / �1 = �2 µ/ 0 = 0 µµµµA / 1 = 2 µA / 2 = +4

µA] 2301 3

Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when carrying out a duplex job. Use this SP if there is poor image transfer on the rear side of duplex copies. Cleaning [�10 ~ 1 / �1 / 1 µA/step] 2301 4 Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller for roller cleaning. Increase the current if toner remains on the roller after cleaning. (Remaining toner may cause dirty background on the rear side.)

2802 Forced Developer Churning

2802 1 Initializes the developer and checks the TD sensor output (Vt). The machine mixes the developer for 2 minutes while reading and displaying the Vt value. The machine does not initialize the TD sensor output. If the machine has not been used for a long period, prints may have a dirty background. In a case like this, use this SP to mix the developer. The message �Completed� is displayed when the program ends normally.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-7

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

2906* Tailing Correction

Shift value [0.0 ~ 1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 2906 1 Shifts the image position at the intervals specified by SP2-906-002. When the copier is continuously printing vertical lines (such as in tables), the paper may not separate correctly. This SP can prevent this. Interval [1 ~ 10 / 1 / 1 page/step] 2906 2 Changes the interval of the image position shift specified by SP2-906-001.

2908 Forced Toner Supply

2908 1 Supplies the toner to the development unit. The processing stops under either of the following conditions: • The toner density in the development unit reaches the standard level. • The processing has continued for two 2 minutes.

2915* Polygon Mirror Motor Idling Time [0 = None / 1 = 15 s / 2 = 25 s]

2915 1 Specifies the polygon mirror motor idling time. The polygon mirror motor starts its operation when an original is set, a key is pressed, or the platen cover or ADF is opened. The motor stops if no manual operation is performed for the specified time. When you set �0�, the motor does not stop while the copier is in the standby status.

2921* Toner Supply Mode

2921 1 [0 = Sensor 1 / 1 = Sensor 2 (DFU)] Selects the toner supply mode. Keep the default setting as long as the TD sensor is working.

2922* Toner Supply Time [0.1 ~ 5.0 / 0.6 / 0.1 s/step]

2922 1 Adjusts the toner supply time. The toner supply motor remains on for the specified time. To validate this setting, select �0� in SP2-921-001. Specify a greater value if the user tends to make many copies having high proportions of solid black image areas.

2926* Standard Vt [0.00 ~ 5.00 / 2.50 / 0.01 V/step] DFU

2926 1 Adjusts Vts (the Vt value for new developer). The TD sensor output is adjusted to this value during the TD sensor initial setting process. This SP is effective only when SP2-921001 is �0�, �1�, or �2�.

2927* ID Sensor Control [0 = No / 1 = Yes]

2927 1 Determines whether the ID sensor signal is referenced or not for the toner density control. Keep the default value in usual operations.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-8

2928 Toner End Clear

2928 1 Clears the following messages and counters without supplying the toner: • Toner near end message • Toner end message • Toner near end counter • Toner end counter Do not use this SP in usual operations. When the toner in the development unit is abnormally insufficient, the drum may attract the toner carrier to its surface. The toner carrier damages the drum surface..

2929* Vref Limits Adjust the upper or lower Vref limit.

2929 1 Upper [0.50 ~ 3.50 / 3.20 / 0.01V/step] DFU 2929 2 Lower [0.50 ~ 3.50 / 0.70 / 0.01V/step] DFU

2994* ID Sensor Detection Temperature [30 ~ 90 / 30 / 1 °C/step]

2994 1 Adjusts the temperature threshold. The ID sensor signal is not referenced when the fusing temperature is at the specified level or higher while the copier is recovering or starting up.

2996* Transfer Roller Cleaning [0 = No / 1 = Yes]

2996 1 Cleans or does not clean the transfer roller before each job. Select �1� if the backside of the paper becomes unclean when output. Note that the copier takes a longer time to output the first copy when you select �1�. If you select �0�, the transfer roller is never cleaned.

2998* Main Scan Magnification [�0.5 ~ +0.5 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]

2998 1 Adjusts the magnification (☛ 3.14). The specification is 100 ± 1.0%.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-9

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

SP4-XXX (Scanner) 4008* Sub-Scan Magnification (Scanner) [-0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]

4008 1 Adjusts the sub-scan magnification (☛ 3.14).

4009* Main Scan Magnification (Scanner) [�0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]

4009 1 Adjusts the main-scan magnification (☛ 3.14).

4010* Leading Edge Registration (Scanner) [�5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

4010 1 Adjusts the leading edge registration (☛ 3.14).

4011* Side-to-side Registration (Scanner) [�1.0 ~ +1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

4011 1 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in platen mode (☛ 3.14).

4012* Scan Erase Margin [0 ~ 9.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

4012 1 Leading edge 4012 2 Trailing edge 4012 3 Left 4012 4 Right

Adjusts the scanning margin. Generally, the scanning margin should be as little as possible. To adjust the image area, use SP2-101.

4013 Scanner Free Run

4013 1 Conducts the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on.

4015* White Plate Scanning

Start position [�3.0 ~ +6.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 4015 1 Adjusts the scanning start position on the white plate. The base value is 17.8 mm from the scanner home position. This SP specifies the offset from this base value. Scanning length [�3.0 ~ +6.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 4015 2 Adjusts the distance of the white plate scan. The scan begins from the start position (SP4-015-001) and ends at the specified distance. The base value is 2.0 mm. This SP decides the offset from this base value. Specify 0 (zero) or a larger value.

4428 Scan Auto Adjustment

4428 1 Conducts the automatic scanner adjustment. Use this SP after replacing the white plate (☛ 3.14.2).

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-10

4901 SBU White Level Adjustment

Black Display-Error [0 = Normal / 1 = Error] 4901 1 Displays the return code of the black-level adjustment. When an error is detected, SC143 or SC145 is generated. Black Feedback-EVEN [0 ∼ 8191] 4901 2 Displays the feedback value of the even channels given by the SBU. Normally, the value is 1, 2, 3, …, 8188, 8189, or 8190. However, machine may operate normally even when the value is 0 or 8191. Black Feedback-ODD [0 ∼ 8191] 4901 3 Displays the feedback value of the odd channels given by the SBU. Normally, the value is 1, 2, 3, …, 8188, 8189, or 8190. However, machine may operate normally even when the value is 0 or 8191. Black Display-Target [0 ∼ 63 / 10 / 1/step] 4901 4 Displays the target value for the black-level adjustment executed during machine initialization. Normally, the value is 10. Other values indicate that the adjustment has ended unsuccessfully. White Target [0 ∼ 511 / 511 / 1/step] 4901 5* Displays the target value for the white-level adjustment. White Result [0 ∼ 511 / 0 / 1/step] 4901 6 Displays the result of the white-level adjustment. White Display-Error [0 = Normal / 1 = Error] 4901 8 Displays the return code of the white-level adjustment. When an error is detected, SC143 is generated. White Display-Overflow [0 = Normal / 1 = Error] 4901 9 Displays a return code of the white-level adjustment. The code �1� (error) is returned if the adjustment result is not in the range of the values in SP4-901-6. White Number of Attempt [0 ∼ 20 / 0 / 1/step] 4901 10 Displays how many times the white-level adjustment is retried. The value does not include the first execution of the white adjustment. For example, if the value is �2�, this indicates that the white-level adjustment has been executed three times. The white-level adjustment can be executed 20 times or less. Therefore, if the value is �20�, this indicates that the white-level adjustment has ended abnormally (as described, the value �20� does not include the first execution). If the white-level adjustment is unsuccessful, the machine uses the result of the latest, successful white-level adjustment. Auto Adjustment Setting [222 ∼ 281 / 256 / 1/step] 4901 11* Displays the parameter of the white-level adjustment. The value is based on the result of SP4-901-12. Auto Adjustment-Result [0 ∼ 600 / 0 / 1/step] 4901 12 Displays the result of the white-level adjustment. Normally, the value is between 228 and 281 (including the both values). When the value is normal, it is stored as the value of SP4-901-11. Auto Adjustment-Error [0 = Normal / 1 = Error] 4901 14 Displays a return code of the white-level adjustment. The code «1» (error) is returned if the adjustment result value is less than 228 or larger than 281 (☛ SP4-901-012).

4902* Exposure Lamp ON [0: OFF / 1: ON]

4902 1 Turns the exposure lamp on or off. To turn on the exposure lamp, specify �1�; to turn it off specify �0�.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-11

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

4903* ADS Level [0 ∼ 255 / 252 / 1/step]

4903 1 Adjusts the ADS level.

4904* ADS Lower Limit [0 ∼ 255 / 80 / 1/step]

4904 1 Adjusts the ADS lower limit.

4905* ADS Level [0 = All / 1 = One]

4905 1 Checks the whole area (0 = All) or the specific areas (1 = One) to adjust the ADS level. The specific areas are as follows: • ADF: ±37.5 mm from the center • Platen Cover: 15 to 90 mm from the left edge

4921* Image Adj Selection

Copy [0 ~ 10 / 0 / 1/step] 4921 1 Selects which mode the settings from SP4-922 to SP4-932 are used for. 0 = None 1 = Text 1 2 =Text 2 3= Photo 1 4 = Photo 2 5 = Photo 3 6 = Special 1 7 = Special 2 8 = Special 3 9 = Special 4 10 = Special 5

4922* Scanner Gamma [0=System default/1=Text/2=Photo]

4922 1 Copy Selects �text� or �photo� as the priority output mode. This setting is applied to all image processing modes of SP4-921.

Notch Selection 4923* Selects the value of the center ID adjustment notch for the ID adjustment LEDs. • Normally the center notch is 3 (range 1-5). If �1 is selected, each notch shifts

down (becomes lighter). If +1 is selected, each notch shifts up (becomes darker). • This setting is applied to all image processing modes of SP4-921.

4923 1 Copy [�1 = Light / 0 = Normal / +1 = Dark]

Texture Removal 4926* Adjusts the texture removal level that is used with error diffusion. 0: The default value for each mode is used. Text 1, Photo 2, Special 2, and Special 5 have a default of 3 and Photo 1, 3 have a default of 1. 1: No removal applied. 2 � 5: Removal applied at the level specified here. The higher the setting (level), the less clear the image will become (more texture removal). This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.

4926 1 Copy [0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1/step]

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-12

Line Width Correction 4927* Adjusts the line width correction algorithm. Positive settings produce thicker lines; negative settings produce thinner lines. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.

4927 1 Copy [�2 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]

Independent Dot Erase 4928* Selects the dot erase level. Higher settings provide greater erasure. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.

4928 1 Copy [�2 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]

4929* Positive/Negative [0 = No, 1 = Yes]

4929 1 Copy Inverts white and black. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.

4930* Sharpness-Edge [�2 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]

4930 1 Copy Adjust the clarity. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.

4931* Sharpness-Solid [�2 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]

4931 1 Copy Adjust the clarity. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.

4932* Sharpness-Low ID [�2 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]

4932 1 Copy Adjust the clarity. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.

4941* White Line Erase [0 ~ 2 / 1 / 1/step]

4941 1 Selects the white line erase level. 0: None 1: Weak 2: Strong • This setting is effective only Photo 1, Photo 3, Special 3 or Special 4 mode. • 0: White line erase is not used, and white level correction is used instead· • This setting is applied regardless of what mode has been selected in SP4-921.

4942* Black Line Erase [0 ~ 3 / 2 / 1/step]

4942 1 Selects the black line erase level. This setting is effective only when originals are scanned by the ADF. [0 = No / 1 = Very weak / 2 = Weak / 3 = Strong] This setting is applied regardless of what mode has been selected in SP4-921.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-13

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

SP5-XXX (Mode) 5001 All Indicators On

5001 1 Turns on all LEDs. The LCD turns on or off every 3 seconds. Press the reset key to end this program.

5113* Optional Counter Type 0: None

11: MF key card (Increment) 12: MF key card (Decrement)

5113 1 Selects the corresponding key for installed devices such as coin lock.

5120* Clear-OP Count Remove [0=Yes / 1=Standby only / 2=No]

5120 1 Specifies the condition to reset the copy job settings when the key counter is removed. • 0 = Yes: The settings are cleared when the counter is removed. • 1 = Standby only: The settings are cleared when the counter is removed at the end of a job. • 2 = No: The settings are not cleared under either condition. As for duplex copying, the job settings are always preserved regardless of these setting.

5121* Count Up Timing [0 = Feed In / 1 = Exit]

5121 1 Selects the count-up timing. • 0 = Feed: At each paper feed • 1= Exit: At each paper exit

5501* PM Alarm Interval [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0K copies/step]

5501 1 Printout Specifies when the PM alarm occurs.

5801 Memory Clear (basic model only)

5801 2 Engine ☛ 5.1.5

5802 Machine Free Run

5802 1 Conducts machine free run (including the scanner unit). Press �ON� to start; press �OFF� to stop.

Input Check 5803 ☛ 5.1.6

Output Check 5804 ☛ 5.1.7

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-14

5807* Area Selection

5807 1 Selects the display language. 2 North America 3 Europe 5 Asia 6 China SP5-807-001 is not cleared by SP5-801-002 (☛ 5.1.5). NOTE: SC982 is displayed if you specify a language that is inconsistent with your local model.

5811* Serial Num Input

5811 1 ☛ 5.1.8

5812* Service TEL

Telephone 5812 1 Specifies the telephone number of the service representative. (The number is displayed when a service call condition occurs.) To input a dash, press #. To delete the current telephone number, press &. Facsimile 5812 2 Specifies the fax number printed on user counter reports. To input a dash, press #. To delete the current fax number, press &.

5824 NVRAM Upload

5824 1 ☛ 5.1.9

5825 NVRAM Download

5825 1 ☛ 5.1.9

5827 Program Download (☛ 5.1.10)

5827 1 Copies the software program from the IC card to the flash ROM. To execute this SP, ➀ turn off the main power switch, ➁ insert the IC card, ➂ press the power key and hold it down, and ➃ turn on the main power switch (while you keep holding the power key). The copier reads the software program from the IC card if you turn on the copier like this. The SP mode is automatically activated.

5901 Printer Free Run

5901 1 Executes the free run. Press �ON� to start; press �OFF� to stop.

5902 Test Pattern Print

5902 1 ☛ 5.1.11

5907* Plug & Play Setting

5907 1 Selects the brand name and production name for the Plug and Play function. These names are stored in the NVRAM. When the NVRAM data is corrupted, selects these names once again. Use the right-arrow or left-arrow key to scroll through the list of brand names. To select a brand name, press the OK key. An asterisk (*) indicates which manufacture is currently selected. ☛ 5.1.5

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-15

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5912* PCU Alarm Counter (Printout) [0 ∼ 255 / 45 / 1/step]

5912 1 Specifies the PCU alarm level. The PCU alarm is issued when the following condition is met: PAc x 1000 >= PCUc where PAc is the value specified in this SP and PCUc is the PCU counter. When you specify 0 (zero), the PCU alarm is deactivated.

5990 SMC Print

5990 1 All 5990 2 SP 5990 3 User Program 5990 4 Logging Data 5990 5 Big font

☛ 5.1.12

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-16

SP6-XXX (Peripherals) 6006* ADF Adjustment (☛ 3.14)

NOTE: Available menus depend on the machine model and its configuration. StoS/Front Regist [�1.0 ~ +1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 6006 1 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front side of the original, for ADF mode. Use the # key to select �+� or ��� before entering the value

Leading Regist [�5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 6006 2 Adjusts the leading edge registration for ADF mode. Use the # key to select �+� or ��� before entering the value. Trailing Erase [�3.0 ~ +3.0 / �1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 6006 3 Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for ADF mode. Use the # key to select �+� or ��� before entering the value. Sub-scan Magnif [�0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step] 6006 5 Adjust the sub-scan magnification for the ADF.

6009 ADF Free Run

6009 1 Performs an ADF free run. Press «ON» to start; press «OFF» to stop.

6910* ADF Shading Time [0 ~ 60 / 30 / 1 s/step]

6910 1 Adjusts the interval used for the shading processing in the ADF mode. Light and heat in the room may affect the scanner response. Reduce this setting if copy quality indicates that the white level is drifting during ADF copy jobs.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-17

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

SP7-XXX (Data Log) 7001* Total Operation

7001 1 Displays the total operation time (total drum rotation time).

7401* Counter�SC Total [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7401 1 Displays how many times SC codes are generated.

7403* SC History

7403 1 Displays the histories of the latest 10 SC codes.

7502* Counter�Paper Jam [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7502 1 Displays the total number of copy paper jams.

7503* Counter�Orgn Jam [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7503 1 Displays the total number of original jams,

Counter-Each P Jam [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7504* Displays the total number of the paper jams classified by timing and location. At power on 7504 1 Paper jam occurs at power on. Off-Regist NoFeed 7504 10 Paper does not reach the registration sensor (from a paper tray). Off-1 Vertical SN 7504 11 Paper does not reach the relay sensor. On-1 Vertical SN 7504 12 Paper is caught at the relay sensor. Off-Regist Bypass 7504 50 Paper does not reach the registration sensor (from the by-pass tray). Off-Regist Duplex 7504 60 Paper does not reach the registration sensor during reverse-side printing (for duplex printing). On-Regist SN 7504 70 Paper is caught at the registration sensor. On-Exit SN 7504 120 Paper is caught at the exit sensor (previous page). Off-Exit SN 7504 121 Paper does not reach the exit sensor. On-Exit SN 7504 122 Paper is caught at the exit sensor. Off-Dup Inverter 7504 123 Paper does not reach the duplex inverter sensor (from the registration roller). On-Dup Inverter 7504 125 Paper is caught at the duplex inverter sensor.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-18

Counter-Each O Jam [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7505* Displays the total number of the original jams on the ADF that have occurred at a certain timing or at a certain location. Off-Regist SN 7505 210 The original does not reach the registration sensor. On-Regist SN 7505 211 The original is caught at the registration sensor. Insufficient gap 7505 216 The distance between originals is not sufficient. This jam can occur when the original is not of the standard size.

7507* Display-P Jam History

7507 1 Displays the latest 10 paper-jam history. The list below shows the possible 12 codes: 1 10 11 12 50 60 70 120 121 122 123 125 The codes correspond to the menus of SP7-504. For example, the code 1 corresponds to SP7-504-001, and the code 10 corresponds to SP7-504-10.

7508* Display-O Jam History

7508 1 Displays the total number of the original-jams history. The possible codes are as follows: 210 211 216 The codes correspond to the menus of SP7-505. For example, the code 210 corresponds to SP7-505-210, and the code 211 corresponds to SP7-505-211.

7801 Memory/Version/PN

Memory/Version (BICU) 7801 2 Displays the version of the BICU board

7803* Display�PM Count

7803 1 Displays the PM counter.

7804 Reset�PM Counter

7804 1 Resets the PM counter (SP7-803-001). When the program ends normally, the message �Completed� is displayed.

7807 Reset�SC/Jam Counters

7807 1 Resets the SC, paper, original, and total jam counters. When the program ends normally, the message �Completed� is displayed. SP7-807-1 does not reset the following logs: SP7-507 (Display-Paper Jam History) and SP7-508 (Display-Original Jam History).

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-19

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

7808 Reset�Counters

7808 1 Resets all counters except for the management counters. The management counters are the counters that are not changed by NVRAM Download (SP5-825-001; ☛ NVRAM Download (SP5-825-001) in section 5.1.9). When the program ends normally, the message the message �Completed� is displayed.

7810 Reset�Key Op Code

7810 1 Resets the key operator code. Use SP7-810-1 when the customer has forgotten the key-operator code. When the program ends normally, the message �Completed� is displayed, if the program ends abnormally, an error message is displayed. If the customer forgets the key operator code. To specify a new key-operator code, use the User Tools: System Settings → Key Operator Tools → Key Operator Code → On → Enter Key Operator Code.

7832* Display-Self-Diag

7832 1 Displays the SC codes and the number of their occurrences. Each number is in the range of 0 to 9999.

Dsply�Info Count 7991* Displays the total operating time or the total number of operations. The time is displayed in the following format: day:hour:minute:second. Dsply-Timer Count 7991 1 The total of the time when the main switch is kept on (excluding the time when the safety switch is off). Dsply-ID S Work 7991 3 The total of the time when the ID sensor is working. Dsply-Dev Counter 7991 4 The total number of paper outputs. Dsply-ID Er Count 7991 5 The total number of ID-sensor errors.

7992* Reset-Info Count

Reset-Timer Count 7992 1 Clears the timer counter (SP7-991-001). Reset-Dev Count 7992 4 Clears the development counter (SP7-991-004). Reset-ID Er Count 7992 5 Clears the ID sensor error counter (SP7-991-005).

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-20

SP8-XXX (History) 8192* C: Total Scan PGS [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

8192 1 Displays the total number of scanned originals. The both sides are counted when the front and reverse sides of an original (fed from the ADF) are scanned.

8221* ADF Org Feed [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

Front 8221 1 Displays the total number of scanned front sides of originals fed from the ADF.

8381* T: Total Prt PGS [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

8381 1 Displays the print count of all application programs.

8382* C: Total Prt PGS [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

8382 1 Displays the print count of the copier application program.

8411* Prints/Duplex [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

8411 1 Displays the total count of the duplex printing.

8422* C: PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

8422 1 C: PrtPGS/Dup Comb (Simplex > Duplex) 8422 4 C: PrtPGS/Dup Comb (Simplex Combine) 8422 5 C: PrtPGS/Dup Comb (Duplex Combine) 8422 6 C: PrtPGS/Dup Comb (2>)

Displays the total print count of copier application classified by combination/duple type.

8442* C: PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

8442 2 A4 8442 3 A5 8442 5 B5 8442 7 LG 8442 8 LT 8442 9 HLT

8442 254 Other (Standard) 8442 255 Other (Custom)

Displays the number of pages printed by the copier application program.

8451* C: PrtPGS/Ppr Tray [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

8451 1 Bypass Tray 8451 2 Tray 1 8451 3 Optional Tray

Displays the total print count classified by paper source.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-21

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

8462* C: PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0 ∼ 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

8462 1 Normal 8462 4 Thick 8462 7 OHP 8462 8 Other

Displays the total number of pages printed by the copier application program.

8522* C:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step]

8522 1 Sort The SP counts by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy application.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-22

5.1.3 SP MODE TABLES�OTHER MODELS

The tables in this section (5.1.3) list the service programs (SPs) that are available when the controller box is installed. For the SPs that are available without the controller box, see the previous section (5.1.2).

Keys in the tables: • Asterisk (*): The settings are saved in the NVRAM. Most of them return to the

default values when you execute SP5-998-001 (Engine) and SP5-801-001 (All Clear) (☛ 5.1.5).

• DFU: The program is for the design/factory use only. Do not change the settings. • Brackets ([ ]): The brackets enclose the setting rage, default value, and minimum

step with unit ([Minimum ∼ Maximum / Default / Step]). • SSP: The program is in the SSP Mode only. Consult your supervisor before

using the program. SP1-XXX (Feed)

1001* Leading Edge Registration [�9.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 1001 1 All Trays 1001 2 By-pass 1001 3 Duplex

Adjusts the leading-edge registration (☛ 3.14).

1002* Side-to-Side Registration [�9.0 ~ 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

1002 1 1st Tray 1002 2 Optional tray 1002 5 By-pass

Adjusts the side-to-side registration (☛ 3.14). SP1-002-001 is applied to all trays. SP1-002-002 and 005 adjusts the difference from SP1-002-001.

1002 6 Duplex Adjusts the side-to-side registration of the 2nd side in duplex copying. The 1st side is adjusted by SP1-002-001 through 005.

1003* Paper Feed Timing Adjusts the amount of paper buckle on the

registration roller. 1003 1 1st tray [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 mm/step] 1003 3 Optional tray [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 mm/step] 1003 4 By-pass feed [0 ~ 10 / 5 / 1 mm/step] 1003 5 Duplex [0 ~ 20 / 5 / 1 mm/step]

1103* Fusing Idling [0 = No / 1 = Yes]

1103 1 Enables or disables the contact-release control. The table below lists the results.

Setting 0 = No 1 = Yes C-R control Works Does not work Idling time Shorter Longer Fusing quality Lower Higher

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-23

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Fusing Temperature Adjustment 1105* Adjusts the target fusing temperature. Note that the thermistor is at the center of the hot roller.

1105 1 Warm Up-Center [140 ~ 180 / 160 / 1°C/step] 1105 3 Standby-Center [140 ~ 160 / 150 / 1°C/step] 1105 5 Copying-Center [140 ~ 180 / 160 / 1°C/step] 1105 7 Low Level 2-Center [0 ~ 80 / 60 / 1°C/step] 1105 9 Thick-Center [140 ~ 185 / 165 / 1°C/step]

1106 Display Fusing

1106 1 Center Displays the fusing temperature.

Fusing Soft Start DFU 1107* Adjusts the number of zero-cross cycles of the fusing lamp AC supply needed to bring the fusing lamp power to 100% while bringing the lamp up to the standby temperature or while copying. Increase this value if the machine is experiencing sudden power dropouts.

1107 1 Warm Up Soft Start [0 = 10 cycles / 1 = 20 cycles / 2 = 50 cycles] 1107 2 Other Soft Start [0 = 10 cycles / 1 = 20 cycles / 2 = 50 cycles / 3 = 1 cycle] 1107 3 Soft Stop Setting [0: No / 1: Yes]

1108* Set-Fusing Start [0 = 1s / 1 = 1.5s / 2 = 2s]

1108 1 Specifies the interval for fusing-temperature control.

1109 Nip Band Check

1109 1 Conducts the nip band check (☛ 3.5.7).

1110* Fan Control Timer [30 ~ 60 / 30 / 1 s/step]

1110 1 Specifies the fan control time. The fan motor keeps its operating speed for the specified time before changing the speed or stopping. The fan control timer prevents the exhaust fan from suddenly stopping. This function protects the copier from overheating.

1902 Display-AC Freq.

1902 1 Displays the fusing lamp power control frequency (as detected by the zero cross signal generator). The displayed value is 1/5 the actual frequency: 10 and lower = 50 Hz, 12 and lower = 60 Hz.

1911* By-pass Envelope [0 = Disabled / 1= Enabled]

1911 1 The program dedicated to envelope printing runs when you enable this program (SP1-911-001) and you select �Thick Paper� as the paper type of the by-pass tray ($ > System Settings > Tray Paper Settings > Paper Type: Bypass Tray).

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-24

SP2-XXX (Drum) 2001* Charge Roller Bias Adjustment

Printing [�2100 ~ �1500 / �1650 / 1 V/step] 2001 1 Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for printing. The voltage changes automatically as charge-roller voltage control works. The value here is the base value for the charge-roller voltage control. ID sensor pattern [0 ~ 400 / 300 / 1 V/step] 2001 2 Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for the ID sensor pattern (as part of charge-roller voltage correction). The charge-roller voltage is obtained by adding SP2-001-002 to the value of SP2-001-001.

2101* Erase Margin Adjustment Adjusts the width of the erased area (☛ 3.14).

2101 1 Leading edge [0.0 ~ 9.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Specification: 2 ± 1.5 mm

Trailing [0.0 ~ 9.0 / 4.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Specification: 2 +2.5/�1.5 mm

2101 2

The rear trailing edge is this value plus 1.2 mm. Left side [0.0 ~ 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

Specification: 2 ± 1.5 mm 2101 3

The rear left edge is this value plus 0.3 mm. Right side [0.0 ~ 9.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

Specification: 2 +2.5/�1.5 mm 2101 4

The rear right edge is this value plus 0.3 mm.

2201* Development Bias Adjustment

Printing [�1500 ~ �200 / �650 / 1 V/step] 2201 1 Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller for printing. Image density becomes higher when you specify a smaller value (a greater absolute value). Image density becomes lower when you specify a greater value (a smaller absolute value).ID sensor pattern [�2 = LL (220 V) / -1 = L (260 V) / 0 = N (300 V) / 1 =

H (340 V) / 2 = HH (380 V)] 2201 2

Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller for the ID sensor pattern. The voltage applied is obtained by adding SP2-201-002 to SP2-201-1. The setting affects ID sensor pattern density, which in turn affects the toner supply.

2213* Outputs after Near End

2213 1 [0 = 50 pages / 1 = 20 pages] Sets the number of copy/print/fax pages that can be made after toner near-end has been detected. Reduce the number of pages if the user normally makes copies with a high image ratio.

2214 Developer Initialization

2214 1 Initializes the TD sensor toner supply target voltage and the TD sensor gain value. Execute this SP replacing the developer or the TD sensor.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-25

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

2221 ID Sensor Error Analysis (☛ 5.1.4)

2221 1 Vsg Displays the Vsg value. 2221 2 Vsp Displays the Vsp value. 2221 3 PWM Displays the PWM value. 2221 4 Vsdp Displays the Vsdp value. 2221 5 Vt Displays the Vt value. 2221 6 Vts Displays the Vts value.

2301* Transfer Current Adjustment (☛ 6.6).

Normal paper [�2 = �4 µA / �1 = �2 µA / 0 = 0 µµµµA / 1 = 2 µA / 2 = +4 µA]

2301 1

Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when feeding from a paper tray. Use a high setting if the user normally feeds relatively thick paper (within spec) from a paper tray Thick/Special paper [�2 = �4 µA / �1 = �2 µA / 0 = 0 µµµµA / 1 = 2 µA / 2 =

+4 µA] 2301 2

Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when feeding from the by-pass tray. Use a high setting (a) if the user normally feeds relatively thick paper from the by-pass tray, or (b) if waste toner is re-attracted from the drum (which can occur when using transparencies). Duplex [�2 = �4 µA / �1 = �2 µ/ 0 = 0 µµµµA / 1 = 2 µA / 2 = +4

µA] 2301 3

Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller when carrying out a duplex job. Use this SP if there is poor image transfer on the rear side of duplex copies. Cleaning [�10 ~ 1 / �1 / 1 µA/step] 2301 4 Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller for roller cleaning. Increase the current if toner remains on the roller after cleaning. (Remaining toner may cause dirty background on the rear side.)

2802 Forced Developer Churning

2802 1 Initializes the developer and checks the TD sensor output (Vt). The machine mixes the developer for 2 minutes while reading and displaying the Vt value. The machine does not initialize the TD sensor output. If the machine has not been used for a long period, prints may have a dirty background. In a case like this, use this SP to mix the developer. The message �Completed� is displayed when the program ends normally.

2906* Tailing Correction

Shift value [0.0 ~ 1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 2906 1 Shifts the image position at the intervals specified by SP2-906-002. When the copier is continuously printing vertical lines (such as in tables), the paper may not separate correctly. This SP can prevent this. Interval [1 ~ 10 / 1 / 1 page/step] 2906 2 Changes the interval of the image position shift specified by SP2-906-001.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-26

2908 Forced Toner Supply

2908 1 Supplies the toner to the development unit. The processing stops under either of the following conditions: • The toner density in the development unit reaches the standard level. • The processing has continued for two 2 minutes.

2915* Polygon Mirror Motor Idling Time [0 = None / 1 = 15 s / 2 = 25 s]

2915 1 Specifies the polygon mirror motor idling time. The polygon mirror motor starts its operation when an original is set, a key is pressed, or the platen cover or ADF is opened. The motor stops if no manual operation is performed for the specified time. When you set �0�, the motor does not stop while the copier is in the standby status.

2921* Toner Supply Mode

2921 1 [0 = Sensor 1 / 1 = Sensor 2 (DFU)] Selects the toner supply mode. Keep the default setting as long as the TD sensor is working. You can selects �3� only when the TD sensor is abnormal. Do not select �1� or �2�.

2922* Toner Supply Time [0.1 ~ 5.0 / 0.6 / 0.1 s/step]

2922 1 Adjusts the toner supply time. The toner supply motor remains on for the specified time. To validate this setting, select �0� in SP2-921-001. Specify a greater value if the user tends to make many copies having high proportions of solid black image areas.

2926* Standard Vt [0.00 ~ 5.00 / 2.50 / 0.01 V/step] DFU

2926 1 Adjusts Vts (the Vt value for new developer). The TD sensor output is adjusted to this value during the TD sensor initial setting process. This SP is effective only when SP2-921001 is �0�, �1�, or �2�.

2927* ID Sensor Control [0 = No / 1 = Yes]

2927 1 Determines whether the ID sensor signal is referenced or not for the toner density control. Keep the default value in usual operations.

2928 Toner End Clear

2928 1 Clears the following messages and counters without supplying the toner: • Toner near end message • Toner end message • Toner near end counter • Toner end counter Do not use this SP in usual operations. When the toner in the development unit is abnormally insufficient, the drum may attract the toner carrier to its surface. The toner carrier damages the drum surface..

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-27

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

2929* Vref Limits Adjust the upper or lower Vref limit.

2929 1 Upper [0.50 ~ 3.50 / 3.20 / 0.01V/step] DFU 2929 2 Lower [0.50 ~ 3.50 / 0.70 / 0.01V/step] DFU

2994* ID Sensor Detection Temperature [30 ~ 90 / 30 / 1 °C/step]

2994 1 Adjusts the temperature threshold. The ID sensor signal is not referenced when the fusing temperature is at the specified level or higher while the copier is recovering or starting up.

2996* Transfer Roller Cleaning [0 = No / 1 = Yes]

2996 1 Cleans or does not clean the transfer roller before each job. Select �1� if the backside of the paper becomes unclean when output. Note that the copier takes a longer time to output the first copy when you select �1�. If you select «0,» the transfer roller is never cleaned.

2998* Main Scan Magnification [�0.5 ~ +0.5 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]

2998 1 Adjusts the magnification (☛ 3.14). The specification is 100 ± 1.0%.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-28

SP4-XXX (Scanner) 4008* Sub-Scan Magnification (Scanner) [-0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]

4008 1 Adjusts the sub-scan magnification (☛ 3.14).

4009* Main Scan Magnification (Scanner) [�0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]

4009 1 Adjusts the main-scan magnification (☛ 3.14).

4010* Leading Edge Registration (Scanner) [�5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

4010 1 Adjusts the leading edge registration (☛ 3.14).

4011* Side-to-side Registration (Scanner) [�1.0 ~ +1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

4011 1 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in platen mode (☛ 3.14).

4012* Scan Erase Margin [0 ~ 9.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

4012 1 Leading edge 4012 2 Trailing edge 4012 3 Left 4012 4 Right

Adjusts the scanning margin. Generally, the scanning margin should be as little as possible. To adjust the image area, use SP2-101.

4013 Scanner Free Run

4013 1 Conducts the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on.

4015* White Plate Scanning

Start position [�3.0 ~ +6.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 4015 1 Adjusts the scanning start position on the white plate. The base value is 17.8 mm from the scanner home position. This SP specifies the offset from this base value. Scanning length [�3.0 ~ +6.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 4015 2 Adjusts the distance of the white plate scan. The scan begins from the start position (SP4-015-001) and ends at the specified distance. The base value is 2.0 mm. This SP decides the offset from this base value. Specify 0 (zero) or a larger value.

4428 Scan Auto Adjustment

4428 1 Conducts the automatic scanner adjustment. Use this SP after replacing the white plate (☛ 3.14.2).

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-29

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

4901 SBU White Level Adjustment

Black Display-Error [0 = Normal / 1 = Error] 4901 1 Displays the return code of the black-level adjustment. When an error is detected, SC143 or SC145 is generated. Black Feedback-EVEN [0 ∼ 8191] 4901 2 Displays the feedback value of the even channels given by the SBU. Normally, the value is 1, 2, 3, …, 8188, 8189, or 8190. However, machine may operate normally even when the value is 0 or 8191. Black Feedback-ODD [0 ∼ 8191] 4901 3 Displays the feedback value of the odd channels given by the SBU. Normally, the value is 1, 2, 3, …, 8188, 8189, or 8190. However, machine may operate normally even when the value is 0 or 8191. Black Display-Target [0 ∼ 63 / 10 / 1/step] 4901 4 Displays the target value for the black-level adjustment executed during machine initialization. Normally, the value is 10. Other values indicate that the adjustment has ended unsuccessfully. White Target [0 ∼ 511 / 511 / 1/step] 4901 5* Displays the target value for the white-level adjustment. White Result [0 ∼ 511 / 0 / 1/step] 4901 6 Displays the result of the white-level adjustment. White Display-Error [0 = Normal / 1 = Error] 4901 8 Displays the return code of the white-level adjustment. When an error is detected, SC143 is generated. White Display-Overflow [0 = Normal / 1 = Error] 4901 9 Displays a return code of the white-level adjustment. The code �1� (error) is returned if the adjustment result is not in the range of the values in SP4-901-6. White Number of Attempt [0 ∼ 20 / 0 / 1/step] 4901 10 Displays how many times the white-level adjustment is retried. The value does not include the first execution of the white adjustment. For example, if the value is �2�, this indicates that the white-level adjustment has been executed three times. The white-level adjustment can be executed 20 times or less. Therefore, if the value is �20�, this indicates that the white-level adjustment has ended abnormally (as described, the value �20� does not include the first execution). If the white-level adjustment is unsuccessful, the machine uses the result of the latest, successful white-level adjustment. Auto Adjustment Setting [222 ∼ 281 / 256 / 1/step] 4901 11* Displays the parameter of the white-level adjustment. The value is based on the result of SP4-901-12. Auto Adjustment-Result [0 ∼ 600 / 0 / 1/step] 4901 12 Displays the result of the white-level adjustment. Normally, the value is between 228 and 281 (including the both values). When the value is normal, it is stored as the value of SP4-901-11. Auto Adjustment-Error [0 = Normal / 1 = Error] 4901 14 Displays a return code of the white-level adjustment. The code «1» (error) is returned if the adjustment result value is less than 228 or larger than 281 (☛ SP4-901-012).

4902* Exposure Lamp ON

4902 1 Turns the exposure lamp on or off. To turn off the exposure lamp, select �OFF.� The exposure lamp turns off automatically after 180 seconds.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-30

4903* ADS Level [0 ∼ 255 / 252 / 1/step]

4903 1 Adjusts the ADS level.

4904* ADS Lower Limit [0 ∼ 255 / 80 / 1/step]

4904 1 Adjusts the ADS lower limit.

4905* ADS Level [0 = All / 1 = One]

4905 1 Checks the whole area (0 = All) or the specific areas (1 = One) to adjust the ADS level. The specific areas are as follows: • ADF: ±37.5 mm from the center • Platen Cover: 15 to 90 mm from the left edge

4921* Image Adj Selection

Copy [0 ~ 10 / 0 / 1/step] 4921 1 Selects which mode the settings from SP4-922 to SP4-932 are used for. 0 = None 1 = Text 1 2 =Text 2 3= Photo 1 4 = Photo 2 5 = Photo 3 6 = Special 1 7 = Special 2 8 = Special 3 9 = Special 4 10 = Special 5 Fax [0 ~ 5 / 0 / 1/step] 4921 2 Selects which mode the settings from SP4-922 to SP4-932 are used for. 0 = None 1 = Text 1 2 =Text 2 3= Photo 1 4 = Photo 2 5 = Special 1 Scanner [0 ~ 4 / 0 / 1/step] 4921 3 Selects which mode the settings from SP4-922 to SP4-932 are used for. 0 = None 1 = Text 1 2 =Text 2 3= Photo 1 4 = Photo 2

4922* Scanner Gamma [0=System default/1=Text/2=Photo]

4922 1 Copy 4922 2 Fax 4922 3 Scanner

Selects �text� or �photo� as the priority output mode. This setting is applied to all image processing modes of SP4-921.

Notch Selection 4923* Selects the value of the center ID adjustment notch for the ID adjustment LEDs. • Normally the center notch is 3 (range 1-5). If �1 is selected, each notch shifts

down (becomes lighter). If +1 is selected, each notch shifts up (becomes darker). • This setting is applied to all image processing modes of SP4-921.

4923 1 Copy 4923 2 Fax 4923 3 Scanner

[�1 = Light / 0 = Normal / +1 = Dark]

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-31

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Texture Removal 4926* Adjusts the texture removal level that is used with error diffusion. 0: The default value for each mode is used. Text 1, Photo 2, Special 2, and Special 5 have a default of 3 and Photo 1-3 have a default of 1. 1: No removal applied. 2 � 5: Removal applied at the level specified here. The higher the setting (level), the less clear the image will become (more texture removal). This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.

4926 1 Copy 4926 2 Fax 4926 3 Scanner

[0 ~ 6 / 0 / 1/step]

Line Width Correction 4927* Adjusts the line width correction algorithm. Positive settings produce thicker lines; negative settings produce thinner lines. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.

4927 1 Copy 4927 2 Fax 4927 3 Scanner

[�2 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]

Independent Dot Erase 4928* Selects the dot erase level. Higher settings provide greater erasure. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.

4928 1 Copy 4928 2 Fax 4928 3 Scanner

[�2 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]

4929* Positive/Negative [0 = No, 1 = Yes]

4929 1 Copy 4929 2 Fax

Inverts white and black. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.

4930* Sharpness-Edge [�2 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]

4930 1 Copy 4930 2 Fax 4930 3 Scanner

Adjust the clarity. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.

4931* Sharpness-Solid [�2 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]

4931 1 Copy 4931 2 Fax 4931 3 Scanner

Adjust the clarity. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.

4932* Sharpness-Low ID [�2 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step]

4932 1 Copy 4932 2 Fax 4932 3 Scanner

Adjust the clarity. This setting is only applied to the originals in SP4-921.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-32

4941* White Line Erase [0 ~ 2 / 1 / 1/step]

4941 1 Selects the white line erase level. 0: None 1: Weak 2: Strong • This setting is effective only Photo 1, Photo 3, Special 3 or Special 4 mode. • 0: White line erase is not used, and white level correction is used instead· • This setting is applied regardless of what mode has been selected in SP4-921.

4942* Black Line Erase [0 ~ 3 / 2 / 1/step]

4942 1 Selects the black line erase level. This setting is effective only when originals are scanned by the ADF. [0 = No / 1 = Very weak / 2 = Weak / 3 = Strong] This setting is applied regardless of what mode has been selected in SP4-921.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-33

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

SP5-XXX (Mode) 5001 All Indicators On

5001 1 Turns on all LEDs.

SSP 5044*

Operation Panel Bit Switch DFU

5113* Optional Counter Type 0: None

5: MF key card (Peace) Japan Only 11: MF key card (Increment) 12: MF key card (Decrement)

5113 1 Selects the corresponding key for installed devices such as coin lock.

5120* Clear-OP Count Remove [0=Yes / 1=Standby only / 2=No]

5120 1 Specifies the condition to reset the copy job settings when the key counter is removed. • 0 = Yes: The settings are cleared when the counter is removed. • 1 = Standby only: The settings are cleared when the counter is removed at the end of a job. • 2 = No: The settings are not cleared under either condition. As for duplex copying, the job settings are always preserved regardless of these setting.

5121* Count Up Timing [0 = Feed In / 1 = Exit]

5121 1 Selects the count-up timing. • 0 = Feed: At each paper feed • 1= Exit: At each paper exit

5162* Application Switching Method [0 = Soft Key Set / 1 = Hard Key Set]

5162 1 Determines whether the application screen is switched with the hardware switch or the software switch.

5302* Time [-1440 ∼ +1440 / 0 / 1 minute/step]

5302 2 Time Difference Species the time difference from GMT.

5307* Summer Time

5307 1 On/Off Validates or invalidates the daylight-saving-time settings (SP5-307-003 and 004).

5307 3 Start Specifies the start of the daylight saving time. 5307 4 End Specifies the end of the daylight saving time.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-34

5404* User Code Count Clear

5404 1 Initializes the user code counter.

5501* PM Alarm Interval

Printout [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 0K copies/step] 5501 1 Specifies when the PM alarm occurs. ADF [0 = Off / 1 = On] 5501 2 Enables or disables the original count alarm.

5504* Jam Alarm [0~3 / 3 / 1 step]

0: Zero (Off) 1: Low (2.5K jams) 2: Medium (3K jams) 3: High (6K jams)

5504 1 Selects the jam alarm level. The jam alarm counter increases if a paper jam occurs (excluding ADF-related jams). The jam alarm counter decreases if no paper jam occurs while the copier prints the specified number of paper. The alarm call occurs if the jam alarm counter reaches 10.

5505* Error Alarm [0 ~ 255 / 20 / 1 hundred sheets/step]

5505 1 Specifies the number of paper (in hundred) used as the error alarm level. The error alarm starts if 5 SC codes are generated before the copier prints the specified number of paper. When the copier has printed the specified number of paper, the SC code counter (of this SP) is cleared to zero.

5507* Supply Alarm Specifies the supply alarm level.

5507 1 Paper Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On, DFU 5507 3 Toner Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On, DFU

5507 128 Interval :Others 5507 133 Interval: A4 5507 134 Interval: A5 5507 142 Interval: B5 5507 164 Interval: LG 5507 166 Interval: LT 5507 172 Interval: HLT

[00250 ~ 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step] DFU

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-35

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5508* CC Call

Jam Remains [0: Disable, 1: Enable] 5508 1* Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam. Continuous Jams [0: Disable, 1: Enable] 5508 2* Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams. Continuous Door Open [0: Disable, 1: Enable] 5508 3* Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open. Low Call Mode [0: Normal mode, 1: Reduced mode] 5508 4* Enables/disables the new call specifications designed to reduce the number of calls. Jam Detection: Time Length [03~30 / 10 / 1/step] 5508 11* Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an �unattended paper jam�. This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1. Jam Detection: Continuous Count [02~10 / 5 / 1/step] 5508 12* Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1. Door Open: Time Length [03~30 / 10 / 1/step] 5508 13* Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call. This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1. CC Call: Long Time Jam [0 = Auto call / 1 = Alarm] 5508 21 Selects the machine reaction to long time jams. CC Call: Continuous Jam [0 = Auto call / 1 = Alarm] 5508 22 Selects the machine reaction to continuous jams. CC Call: Door Open [0 = Auto call / 1 = Alarm] 5508 23 Selects the machine reaction to door open.

5801 Memory Clear

5801 1 All Clear Executes the following memory clears at the same time: SP5-801-2 through 12.

5801 3 SCS Initializes the system-control-service settings. 5801 4 IMH Memory Clear Initializes the image-memory-handler settings. 5801 5 MCS Initializes the memory-control-service settings. 5801 6 Copier application Initializes the copier-application settings. 5801 7 Fax application Initializes the fax-application settings. 5801 8 Printer application Initializes the printer-application settings. 5801 9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner-application settings.

5801 10 Web service/Network application

Deletes the network file application management files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.

5801 11 NCS Initializes the network-control-service settings: the system defaults and interface settings (including IP addresses), Smart Net Monitor for Administrator, Web Status Monitor settings, and the TELNET settings.

5801 12 R-Fax Initializes the job log in ID, Smart Net Monitor for Administrator, job history, and local storage file numbers.

5801 14 Clear DCS Settings 5801 15 Clear UCS Settings

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-36

5802 Machine Free Run 5802 1 Conducts machine free run (including the scanner unit). Press �ON� to start; press

�OFF� to stop.

Input Check 5803 ☛ 5.1.6

Output Check 5804 ☛ 5.1.7

5807* Area Selection

5807 1 Selects the display language group. 2 North America 3 Europe 5 Asia 6 China SP5-807-001 is not cleared by SP5-801-001 and SP5-998-001 (☛ 5.1.5).

5811* Serial Num Input

5811 1 ☛ 5.1.8

5812* Service TEL

Telephone 5812 1 Specifies the telephone number of the service representative. (The number is displayed when a service call condition occurs.) To input a dash, press #. To delete the current telephone number, press &. Facsimile 5812 2 Specifies the fax number printed on user counter reports. To input a dash, press #. To delete the current fax number, press &.

5816* Remote Service

I/F Setting [0=Remote diagnostics off/1=Serial (CSS or NRS) remote diagnostics on/2=Network remote diagnostics]

5816 1

Enables or disables the remote diagnostics function. CE Call 5816 2 Allows the customer representative to start or end the remote machine check using CSS or NRS by pressing the center report key. Function Flag [0 = Disabled / 1 = Enabled] 5816 3 Enables or disables remote diagnosis via the NRS network. Device Information Call Display [0 = Disabled / 1 = Enabled] 5816 6 Determines whether the device information call (NRS) is displayed. SSL Disable [0 = Disabled / 1 = Enabled] 5816 7 Determines whether the SSL sends the remote-communication-gate confirmation. RCG Connect Timeout [1∼ 90 / 10 / 1 second/step] 5816 8 Sets the timer for the remote-communication-gate connection (NRS). RCG Write to Timeout [0∼ 100 / 60 / 1 second/step] 5816 9 Sets the timer for writing data to the remote communication gate (NRS). RCG Read Timeout [0∼ 100 / 60 / 1 second/step] 5816 10 Sets the timer for reading data from the remote communication gate (NRS).

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-37

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5816* Remote Service Port 80 Enable 5816 11 Determines whether permission is granted for access to the SOP via Port 80 (NRS).

5821* Remote Service Address Japan Only.

5821 1* CSS PI Device Code Sets the PI device code. After changing this setting, you must switch the machine off and on.

5821 2* RCG IP Address Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote Communication Gate) destination for call processing at the remote service center. [00000000h ~ FFFFFFFFh/ 00000000h /

5824 NVRAM Upload

5824 1 ☛ 5.1.9

5825 NVRAM Download

1 ☛ 5.1.9

5828* Network Setting

Delete Password 5828 74* Deletes the NCS (Network Control Service) password. Sets the Telnet, WSM (Web Status Monitor), and remote ROM update passwords to NULL (empty) Print Settings List 5828 84* Prints a list of the NCS parameter settings. TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 = Disabled / 1 = Enabled] 5828 90* Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is disabled the Telnet port is closed. Web (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 = Disabled / 1 = Enabled] 5828 91* Disables or enables the Web operation. SMB Computer Name 5828 115* Specifies the SMB computer name. SMB Work Group Name 5828 116* Specifies the SMB work group name.

SSP 5834

Panel Image [0: Off (disabled)/1: On (enabled)]

5834 1 Enables and disables the operation-panel image-transfer feature. Set �1� to enable this feature. When changing the setting to �0�, turn the main power switch off and on validate the setting.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-38

5839* IEEE 1394

Host Name Enter name 5839 4 Specifies the host name. Example: RNP0000000000 Cycle Master OFF / ON 5839 7* Enables or disables the cycle master function for the 1394 bus standard. BCR mode 5839 8* Determines how BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) operates on the 1394 standard bus when the independent node is in any mode other than IRM. (NVRAM: 2bits) Always Effective: Writes from the IRM. Standard: Copies BCR of the IRM after no data is written from the IRM

after the prescribed time has elapsed. IRM Color Copy: BCR normally enabled. IRM 1394a Check 5839 9* Conducts a 1394a check of IRM when the independent node is in any mode other than IRM. OFF: Checks whether IRM conforms to 1394a. ON: After IRM is checked, if IRM does not conform then independent node

switches to IRM. Unique ID 5839 10* Lists the ID (Node_Unique_ID) assigned to the device by the system administrator. OFF: Does not list the Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator.

Instead, the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is used. ON: The Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator is used, and the

Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is ignored. Also, when the serial bus is reset, extra bus transactions are opened for enumeration.

Logout 5839 11* Handles the login request of the login initiator for SBP-2. (1bit) OFF: Disable (refuse login). Initiator retry during login. Login refusal on arrival of

login request (standard operation) ON: Enable (force logout). Initiator retry during login. Login refusal on arrival of

login request, and the initiator forces the login. Login 5839 12* Enables or disables the exclusive login feature (SBP-2 related). OFF: Disables. The exclusive login (LOGIN ORB exClusvie it) is ignored. ON: Enables. Exclusive login is in effect. Login MAX [0~63 / 8 / 1/step], (0 and 63: Reserved) 5839 13* Sets the maximum number of logins from the initiator (6-bits)

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-39

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5840* IEEE 802.11b

SSID 5840 4* Specifies a unique ID (up to 32 characters long) to identify the device when it is operating in an area with another wireless LAN network. Channel MAX [1~14 / 14 / 1/step] 5840 6* Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. This program is displayed only when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface is installed. Channel MIN [1~14 / 14 / 1/step] 5840 7* Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. This program is displayed only when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

00: Key #1 0000 0000 01: Key #2 (Reserved) 0000 0001 10: Key #3 (Reserved) 0000 0010

WEP Key Select

11: Key #4 (Reserved) 0000 0011

5840 11*

Selects the WEP key. [00~11 / 00 / 1 binary] SSID 5840 18* Checks that the specified SSID is correct. This SP is effective only when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface is installed. This SP sees if any incorrect character is included in the SSID that is input from the operation panel. (The characters out of the range from 0x20 to 0x7e are incorrect.) The result is returned to the operation panel: 2: OK, 3: NG NOTE: This SP is necessary for the models that support the multi-function panel, since this panel can input incorrect characters. WEP Mode 0: Max. 64-bit (10 characters)

1: Max. 128-bit (10, 26 characters) 5840 20*

Determines the operation mode of the WEP key. This program is displayed only when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

5842 Net File Analysis

5842 1* Specifies the output mode for debugging of each net file process. The 8th bit is reserved. The 7th bit is the switch of debugging output for each module.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-40

5844* USB

Transfer Rate Full Speed / Auto Change 5844 1* Sets the speed for USB data transmission. Full Speed: (12 Mbps fixed) Auto Change: 480 Mbps/12 Mbps auto adjust Vendor ID [0x0000~0xFFFF/ 0x05CA /1/step], DFU 5844 2* Sets the vendor ID: Initial Setting: 0x05CA Ricoh Company. Product ID [0x0000~0xFFFF/ 0x0403 /1/step], DFU 5844 3* Sets the product ID. Device Release Number [0000~9999/ 0100 /1/step], DFU 5844 4* Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display. Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number recognized as the BCD.

Delivery Server Setting 5845* Provides items for delivery server settings. FTP Port No. [1~65535 / 3670 / 1/step] 5845 1* Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server. IP Address (Primary) Range: 000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255 5845 2* Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting. Error Display Time [0~999 / 300 / 1/step] 5845 6* Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external device. IP Address (Secondary) Range: 000.000.000.000 ~ 255.255.255.255 5845 8* Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting. Delivery Server Model [0~4/ 0 / 1/step] 5845 9* Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device. 0: Unknown 1: SG1 Provided 2: SG1 Package 3: SG2 Provided 4: SG2 Package Delivery Svr Capability [0~255 / 0 / 1/step] Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists

5845 10*

Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to �0�)

Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-41

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5846* UCS Settings

Machine ID (For Delivery Server) Displays ID 5846 1* Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary. Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID 5846 2* Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory. Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on. Maximum Entries [150~999/ 150 /1/step] 5846 3* Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle. If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed. Delivery Server Retry Timer [0~255/ 0 /1/step] 5846 6* Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address book. Delivery Server Retry Times [0~255/ 0 /1/step] 5846 7* Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address book. Delivery Server Maximum Entries [200~999 / 200 / 1/step] 5846 8* Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information managed by UCS.

5846 50* Initialize All Directory Info. Clears all directory information managed by UCS, including all user codes.

5846 51* Upload All Directory Info. Uploads all directory information to the SD card in the service slot.

5846 52* Download All Directory Info. Downloads all directory information from the SD card in the service slot.

5846 53 Upload Info Clear Clears the user information uploaded to the SD card in the service slot.

5846 80* Backup FCU Backs up all directory information in the SD card to the FCU ROM.

5846 90* Plain Data Forbidden Allows you to prevent the address from plain data. This is a security function that prevents unauthorized access to address book data. 0: No check. Address book data not protected. 1: Check. Allows operation of UCS without data

from HDD or SD card and without creating address book information with plain data.

SSP 5846 99*

Bit SW Sets UCS debug output. DFU

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-42

Web Service 5848* 5847 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router. 5847 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The default is equal to 1 gigabyte. NetFile (Lower 4 Bits Only) Bit switch settings. 5848 1* 0000: No access control 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan Router have no effect on capture.

5848 4* User Directory (Lower 4 Bits) 5848 5* Delivery Input (Lower 4 Bits) 5848 6* Fax Control (Lower 4 Bits) 5848 7* Comm. Log Fax (Lower 4 Bits)

Switches access control on and off. 0000: OFF

5849* Installation Date

5849 1* Display DFU 5849 2* Switch to Print DFU

5856 Remote ROM Update

Local port [0 = Not allowed / 1 = Allowed] 5856 2 Allows or does not allow firmware update via the local port (IEEE 1284) during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the main power switch is turned off.

5857* Debug Log Save Function

On/Off (1: ON 0: OFF) 0: OFF, 1: ON 5857 1* Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is switched on. Save to SD Card 5857 6 Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card. Erase Debug Data From SD Card 5857 12 Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging files generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when SP5857 010 or 011 is executed. To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.SD Card Space Available 5857 13 Displays the amount of space available on the SD card. SD to SD Latest 5857 14 Copies the latest 4 -MB logs to the SD card. The logs are written under the /log directory (this SP does not copy data from the SD card in one slot to the SD card in the other slot). The SP gives a unique name to the file newly saved file. You can save multiple logs from multiple machines in one SD card. SD to SD Any 5857 15 Copies the specified log to the SD card. The logs are written under the /log directory (this SP does not copy data from the SD card in one slot to the SD card in the other slot). This SP copies 4-MB data at the maximum, and gives a unique name to the newly saved file. You can save multiple logs from multiple machines in one SD card. If you specify the log number that is not in the HDD, the SP does not execute.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-43

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5857* Debug Log Save Function Make SD Debug File 5857 17 Makes a 4-MB file on the HDD to save logs. The file stores the contents of key number 2225 of SCS (for example, the information of NV usage in SCS). A file is made in the SD when the first log is saved in the SD even if you do not execute this SP. This processing, however, takes a long time; the user may turn the main switch off and on before completion (the user see no message that indicates the completion of the logging when logs are made on the occurrence of an event). The logging takes a shorter time if you have made a log file beforehand. If you try to make a log file on the HDD where another log file has been already made, the contents of key number 2225 is added to the log file in the SD card. In a case like this, a new log file is not made. To make a new log file to supersede an old log file, you must execute SP5-857-012 before executing this SP.

Debug Log Save: SC 5858* Selects the content of the debugging information saved to the destination selected by SP5-857. SP5-858-003 stores the log of the specified SC.

5858 1* Engine SC Stores SC codes generated by copier engine errors. 5858 2* Controller SC Stores SC codes generated by GW controller errors. 5858 3* Any SC [0~65535 / 0 / 1/step] 5858 4* Jam Stores jam errors.

5859* Debug Log Save Function [-9999999~9999999 / 0 / 1/step]

5859 1* Key 1 5859 2* Key 2 5859 3* Key 3 5859 4* Key 4 5859 5* Key 5 5859 6* Key 6 5859 7* Key 7 5859 8* Key 8 5859 9* Key 9

5859 10* Key 10

Allows you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that use common memory on the controller board.

5860* SMTP/POP3/IMAP4

Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1~168 / 72 / 1/step] 5860 20* Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this prescribed time. MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0 = No / 1 = Yes] 5860 21* Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail. SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 = No / 1 = Yes] 5860 22* Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account after the SMTP server is validated.

5869 RAM Disk

5869 1 Main Function Enables or disables the use of the RAM disk.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-44

5870 Common Key Info

Common Key Info Writing 5870 1 Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS specifications. Common Key Info Initialize SSP

5870 3 Initializes the area for the key information.

5873 SD Card Application

Move Exec 5873 1 Transfers the application programs. Undo Exec 5873 2 Nullifies the processing of SP5-873-001.

5902 Test Pattern Print

5902 1 ☛ 5.1.11

5907* Plug & Play Setting

5907 1 Selects the brand name and production name for the Plug and Play function. These names are stored in the NVRAM. When the NVRAM data is corrupted, selects these names once again. Use the right-arrow or left-arrow key to scroll through the list of brand names. To select a brand name, press the OK key. An asterisk (*) indicates which manufacture is currently selected. ☛ 5.1.5

5912* PCU Alarm Counter (Printout) [0 ∼ 255 / 45 / 1/step]

5912 1 Specifies the PCU alarm level. The PCU alarm is issued when the following condition is met: PAc x 1000 >= PCUc where PAc is the value specified in this SP and PCUc is the PCU counter. When you specify 0 (zero), the PCU alarm is deactivated.

5913 Switchover Permission Time [3~30 / 3 / 1 s/step]

5913 2 Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and the operation panel keys have not been used) before another application can gain control of the display.

5914* Application Counter Display [0 = Off / 1 = On]

5914 1* Printer Counter 5914 3* Copy Counter

Selects whether or not these total counters are displayed in the UP mode.

SSP 5970*

Debug Serial Output DFU [0 = Off / 1 = On]

5970 1 Determines whether the debug information is output by the serial port when the machine is powered on.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-45

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5974* Cherry Server 0: Lite, 1: Full

5974 1 Switches writing between the Scan Router Lite application provided and the optional full (Professional) version.

5990 SMC Print

5990 1 All 5990 2 SP 5990 3 User Program 5990 4 Logging Data 5990 5 Diagnostic Report 5990 6 Non-Default 5990 7 NIB Summary

5990 21 Copier UP 5990 22 Scanner SP 5990 23 Scanner UP

☛ 5.1.12

5998 Memory Clear

5998 1 ☛ 5.1.5

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-46

SP6-XXX (Peripherals) 6006* ADF Adjustment (☛ 3.14)

NOTE: Available menus depend on the machine model and its configuration. StoS/Front Regist [�1.0 ~ +1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 6006 1 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front side of the original, for ADF mode. Use the # key to select �+� or ��� before entering the value

Leading Regist [�5.0 ~ +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 6006 2 Adjusts the leading edge registration for ADF mode. Use the # key to select �+� or ��� before entering the value. Trailing Erase [�3.0 ~ +3.0 / �1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 6006 3 Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for ADF mode. Use the # key to select �+� or ��� before entering the value. Sub-scan Magnif [�0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step] 6006 5 Adjust the sub-scan magnification for the ADF.

6009 ADF Free Run

6009 1 Performs an ADF free run. Press «ON» to start; press «OFF» to stop.

6910* ADF Shading Time [0 ~ 60 / 30 / 1 s/step]

6910 1 Adjusts the interval used for the shading processing in the ADF mode. Light and heat in the room may affect the scanner response. Reduce this setting if copy quality indicates that the white level is drifting during ADF copy jobs.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-47

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

SP7-XXX (Data Log) 7001 Total Operation

7001 1 Displays the total operation time (total drum rotation time).

7401* Counter�SC Total [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7401 1 Displays how many times SC codes are generated.

7403* SC History

7403 1 Latest 7403 2 Latest 1 7403 3 Latest 2 7403 4 Latest 3 7403 5 Latest 4 7403 6 Latest 5 7403 7 Latest 6 7403 8 Latest 7 7403 9 Latest 8

7403 10 Latest 9

Displays the histories of the latest 10 SC codes.

7502* Counter�Paper Jam [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7502 1 Displays the total number of copy paper jams.

7503* Counter�Orgn Jam [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7503 1 Displays the total number of original jams,

Counter-Each P Jam [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7504* Displays the total number of the paper jams classified by timing and location. At power on 7504 1 Paper jam occurs at power on. Off-Regist NoFeed 7504 10 Paper does not reach the registration sensor (from a paper tray). Off-1 Vertical SN 7504 11 Paper does not reach the relay sensor. On-1 Vertical SN 7504 12 Paper is caught at the relay sensor. Off-Regist Bypass 7504 50 Paper does not reach the registration sensor (from the by-pass tray). Off-Regist Duplex 7504 60 Paper does not reach the registration sensor during reverse-side printing (for duplex printing). On-Regist SN 7504 70 Paper is caught at the registration sensor. On-Exit SN 7504 120 Paper is caught at the exit sensor (previous page). Off-Exit SN 7504 121 Paper does not reach the exit sensor.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-48

Counter-Each P Jam [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7504* Displays the total number of the paper jams classified by timing and location. On-Exit SN 7504 122 Paper is caught at the exit sensor. Off-Dup Inverter 7504 123 Paper does not reach the duplex inverter sensor (from the registration roller). On-Dup Inverter 7504 125 Paper is caught at the duplex inverter sensor.

Counter-Each O Jam [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7505* Displays the total number of the original jams on the ADF that have occurred at a certain timing or at a certain location. Off-Regist SN 7505 210 The original does not reach the registration sensor. On-Regist SN 7505 211 The original is caught at the registration sensor.

7506* Counter-Each P Jam [0 ~ 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7506 6 A5 LEF 7506 44 HLT LEF

7506 133 A4 SEF 7506 134 A5 SEF 7506 142 B5 SEF 7506 164 LG SEF 7506 166 LT SEF 7506 172 HLT SEF 7506 255 Other

Displays the total number of the paper jams classified by the paper sizes.

7507* Dsply-P Jam Hist

7507 1 Displays the latest 10 paper-jam history. The list below shows the possible 12 codes: 1 10 11 12 50 60 70 120 121 122 123 125 The codes correspond to the menus of SP7-504. For example, the code 1 corresponds to SP7-504-001, and the code 10 corresponds to SP7-504-10.

7508* Dsply-O Jam Hist

7508 1 Displays the total number of the original-jams history. The possible codes are as follows: 210, 211. The codes correspond to the menus of SP7-505. For example, the code 210 corresponds to SP7-505-210.

7801 Memory/Version/PN 7801 255 System/Copy Displays the serial number and the version.

7803* Display�PM Count

7803 1 Displays the PM counter.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-49

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

7804 Reset�PM Counter

7804 1 Resets the PM counter (SP7-803-001). When the program ends normally, the message �Completed� is displayed.

7807 Reset�SC/Jam Counters

7807 1 Resets the SC, paper, original, and total jam counters. When the program ends normally, the message �Completed� is displayed. SP7-807-1 does not reset the following logs: SP7-507 (Display-Paper Jam History) and SP7-508 (Display-Original Jam History).

7808 Reset�Counters

7808 1 Resets all counters except for the management counters. The management counters are the counters that are not changed by NVRAM Download (SP5-825-1; ☛ NVRAM Download (SP5-825-001) in section 5.1.9). When the program ends normally, the message the message «Completed» is displayed.

7810 Reset�Key Op Code

7810 1 Resets the key operator code. Use SP7-810-1 when the customer has forgotten the key-operator code. When the program ends normally, the message «Completed» is displayed, if the program ends abnormally, an error message is displayed. If the customer forgets the key operator code. To specify a new key-operator code, use the User Tools: System Settings → Key Operator Tools → Key Operator Code → On → Enter Key Operator Code.

7832* Display-Self-Diag

7832 1 Displays the SC codes found during the self-diagnostics test, and the number of their occurrences. Each number is in the range of 0 to 9999.

Assert Info. DFU 7901* These SP numbers display the results of the occurrence of the most recent SC code generated by the machine.

7901 1* Source File Name Module name 7901 2* Line Number Number of lines 7901 3* Result Value

Dsply�Info Count 7991 Displays the total operating time or the total number of operations. The time is displayed in the following format: day:hour:minute:second. Dsply-Info Count (Dsply-ID S Work) 7991 3 The total of the time when the ID sensor is working. Dsply-Info Count (Dsply-Dev Counter) 7991 4 The total number of paper outputs. Dsply-Info Count (Dsply-ID Er Count) 7991 5 The total number of ID-sensor errors.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-50

7992 Reset�Info Count

Reset-Dev Count 7992 4 Clears the development counter (SP7-991-004). Reset-Info Count (Reset-ID Er Count) 7992 5 Clears the ID sensor error counter (SP7-991-005).

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-51

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

SP8-XXX (History) Counters in SP8 SP8 consists of various history counters. These counters are commonly used by several machines. Your machine may display some irrelevant counters such as the counters of unsupported paper sizes and unsupported trays. These counters do not affect the other counters or the operations of your machine. Resetting Counters SP5-801-001 (Memory Clear > All Clear) resets all counters in SP8. Prefix The counter names start with a prefix. You find such counters as �T: Total Jobs,� �C: Total Jobs,� and �F: Total Jobs.� These prefixes��T�, �C�, �F�, and others�have the same meanings through SP8. The table lists the prefixes and their meanings.

PREFIX WHAT IT MEANS T: Total: (Grand

Total) Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F, P, etc.).

C: Copy application F: Fax application P: Print application S: Scan application

Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each application when the job was not stored on the document server.

O: Other applications (external network applications, for example)

Refers to network applications such as Web Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software Development Kit) will also be counted with this group in the future.

Abbreviation The counter names are abbreviated. You find such counters as �T: Jobs/LS�, �T: Jobs/PGS�, and �T: Jobs/Apl�. These abbreviations��LS,� �PGS,� �Apl,� and others�have the same meanings through SP8. The table lists the abbreviations and their meanings.

ABBREVIATION WHAT IT MEANS / �By�, e.g. �T:Jobs/Apl� = Total Jobs �by� Application > More (2> �2 or more�, 4> �4 or more� AddBook Address Book Apl Application B/W Black & White Bk Black C Cyan ColCr Color Create ColMode Color Mode Comb Combine Comp Compression

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-52

ABBREVIATION WHAT IT MEANS Deliv Delivery DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used

to store the job on the document server, for example. Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed. Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides Emul Emulation FC Full Color FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.) Full Bleed No Margins GenCopy Generation Copy Mode GPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not

count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)

IFax Internet Fax ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border

removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc. K Black (YMCK) LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server. LSize Large (paper) Size Mag Magnification MC One color (monochrome) NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor

machines remotely. �NRS� is used overseas, �CSS� is used in Japan. Org Original for scanning OrgJam Original Jam Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print

jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different formats.

PC Personal Computer PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages

count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.

PJob Print Jobs Ppr Paper PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam PrtPGS Print Pages R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This

machine is under development and currently not available. Rez Resolution SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed) Scn Scan Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side. S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are

recorded in the SMC report. Svr Server TonEnd Toner End TonSave Toner Save TXJob Send, Transmission YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, BlacK

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-53

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Counters 8 191 T:Total Scan PGS 8 192 C:Total Scan PGS 8 193 F:Total Scan PGS 8 195 S:Total Scan PGS

These SPs count the pages scanned by each application that uses the scanner to scan images. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step]

• SP8-191 to 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages. • Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted. • A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned. • Scans made in the SP mode are not counted.

T:LSize Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 201 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are not counted. Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display. S:LSize Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 205 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are not counted. Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display..

8 221 ADF Org Feeds [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step]

8 221 1 Front Number of front sides fed through the ADF for scanning: With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning. With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user loads face up.)

• If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.

8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp 8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp 8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp

These SPs count the number of pages stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step]

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-54

T:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 301 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP 8-441]. C:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 302 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP 8-442]. F:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 303 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-443]. S:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 305 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-445].

8 30x 1 A3 8 30x 2 A4 8 30x 3 A5 8 30x 4 B4 8 30x 5 B5 8 30x 6 DLT 8 30x 7 LG 8 30x 8 LT 8 30x 9 HLT

8 30x 10 Full Bleed 8 30x 254 Other (Standard) 8 30x 255 Other (Custom)

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-55

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

8 381 T:Total PrtPGS 8 382 C:Total PrtPGS 8 383 F:Total PrtPGS 8 384 P:Total PrtPGS 8 385 S:Total PrtPGS 8 387 O:Total PrtPGS

These SPs count the number of pages printed by the customer. The counter for the application used for storing the pages increments. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step]

• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them.

• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:

• Blank pages in a duplex printing job. • Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip

sheets. • Reports printed to confirm counts. • All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine

maintenance reports, etc.) • Test prints for machine image adjustment. • Error notification reports. • Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.

LSize PrtPGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 391 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger. Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.

8 411 Prints/Duplex This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing. Last pages printed only on one side are not counted. [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step]

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-56

T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 421 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications. C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 422 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the copier application. F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 423 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the fax application. P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 424 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the printer application. S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 425 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the scanner application. O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 427 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by Other applications

8 42x 1 Simplex> Duplex 8 42x 2 Duplex> Duplex 8 42x 3 Book> Duplex 8 42x 4 Simplex Combine 8 42x 5 Duplex Combine 8 42x 6 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up) 8 42x 7 4> 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up) 8 42x 8 6> 6 pages on 1 side (6-Up) 8 42x 9 8> 8 pages on 1 side (8-Up)

8 42x 10 9> 9 pages on 1 side (9-Up) 8 42x 11 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up) 8 42x 12 Booklet 8 42x 13 Magazine

• These counts (SP8-421 to SP8-427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.

• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as one page.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-57

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 441 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications. C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 442 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy application. F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 443 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax application. P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 444 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer application. S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 445 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner application. O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications.

8 44x 1 A3 8 44x 2 A4 8 44x 3 A5 8 44x 4 B4 8 44x 5 B5 8 44x 6 DLT 8 44x 7 LG 8 44x 8 LT 8 44x 9 HLT

8 44x 10 Full Bleed 8 44x 254 Other (Standard) 8 44x 255 Other (Custom)

• These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.

PrtPGS/Ppr Tray [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 451 These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.

8 451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray 8 451 2 Tray 1 Copier 8 451 3 Tray 2 Copier 8 451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option) 8 451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option) 8 451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option) 8 451 7 Tray 6 Not used 8 451 8 Tray 7 Not used 8 451 9 Tray 8 Not used

8 451 10 Tray 9 Not used

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-58

T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 461 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications. • These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is

based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.

• Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted. • During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page

printed on one side counts as 1. C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 462 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy application. F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 463 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax application. P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 464 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application.

8 46x 1 Normal 8 46x 2 Recycled 8 46x 3 Special 8 46x 4 Thick 8 46x 5 Normal (Back) 8 46x 6 Thick (Back) 8 46x 7 OHP 8 46x 8 Other

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-59

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

T:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 521 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all applications. C:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 522 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy application. F:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 523 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax application. Note: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available. P:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 524 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print application. S:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 525 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner application.

8 52x 1 Sort 8 52x 2 Stack 8 52x 3 Staple 8 52x 4 Booklet 8 52x 5 Z-Fold 8 52x 6 Punch 8 52x 7 Other

T:Counter [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 581 These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine. Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only.

O:Counter [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 591 These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:) applications only.

8 591 1 A3/DLT 8 591 2 Duplex 8 591 3 Staple

Dev Counter [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 771 These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development rollers) for black and other color toners. Note: For machines that do not support color, the Black toner count is the same as the Total count.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-60

Toner Remain [0~100/ 0 / 1/step] 8 801 This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows the user to check the toner supply at any time. Note: • This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is

better than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 (10% steps).

• This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the count is done for black only.

Machine Status [0~9999999/ 0 / 1/step] 8 941 These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.

8 941 1 Operation Time Engine operation time. Does not include time while controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not operating).

8 941 2 Standby Time Engine not operating. Includes time while controller saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.

8 941 3 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing background printing.

8 941 4 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on. Includes time while machine is performing background printing.

8 941 5 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performing background printing. Does not include time machine remains powered off with the power switches.

8 941 6 Down Time/SC Total down time due to SC errors. 8 941 7 Down Time/PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing. 8 941 8 Down Time/OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning. 8 941 9 Down Time/TonEnd Total down time due to toner end.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-61

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5.1.4 ID SENSOR ERROR ANALYSIS (SP2-221)

The image quality may become very bad when the ID sensor does not operate properly. However, there is no such SC code that indicates ID-sensor malfunction; instead, SP2-221 shows you some information on the ID sensor. Check this information when the image quality is not very good.

The table lists the information shown with SP2-221 (ID Sensor Error Analysis).

SP Error condition Possible cause Remarks SP2-221-1 Vsg (VG in the display)

Vsg < 2.5V or (Vsg � Vsp) < 1.00V

• ID sensor defective • ID sensor dirty • Drum not charged

SP2-221-2 Vsp (VP in the display)

Vsp > 2.5V or (Vsg � Vsp) < 1.00V

• Toner density very low • ID sensor pattern not created

SP2-221-3 Power (PW in the display)

Vsg < 3.5V when maximum power (979) is applied

• ID sensor defective • ID sensor dirty • Drum not get charged

Power source for the ID-sensor light

SP2-221-4 Vsdp No Error Conditions SP2-221-5 Vt Vt > 4.5V or

Vt < 0.2V • TD sensor defective

SP2-221-6 Vts

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-62

5.1.5 MEMORY CLEAR

Basic Model and Other Models The basic model (the machine without the controller box) stores all the data in the NVRAM on the BICU. The data is cleared by SP5-801-002 (for exceptions, see �Exceptions�).

The other models (the machine with the controller box) stores the engine data in the NVRAM on the BICU, and stores the other data in the NVRAM on the controller. To distinguish between the engine data and the other data, see SP5-801-003 through 015. SP5-801 handles the controller data. Any other data is the engine data. The data in the BICU NVRAM (engine data) is cleared by SP5-998-001 while the data in the controller NVRAM (controller data) is cleared by SP5-801-xxx (for exceptions, see �Exceptions�).

Exceptions SP5-801-002 (basic model) and SP5-998-001 (other models) clears most of the settings and counters stored in the NVRAM on the BICU (the values return to their default values). However, the following settings are not cleared:

• SP5-807 (Area Selection) • SP5-811-001 (Serial Num Input > Code Set) • SP5-812-001 (Service TEL > Telephone) • SP5-812-002 (Service TEL > Facsimile) • SP5-907-001 (Plug & Play) • SP7 (Data Log) • SP8 (History)

Initializing Memory Data Use SP5-801-002 (basic model) or SP5-998-001 (other models) after you have replaced the BICU NVRAM or when the BICU NVRAM data is corrupted. When the program ends normally, the message �Completed� is displayed. When you have replaced the controller NVRAM or when the controller NVRAM data is corrupted, use SP5-801-001. The message is the same as the SP5-801-002 and SP5-998-001.

Machine Data NVRAM Cleared by Remarks Basic All data BICU SP5-801-002

Engine data BICU SP5-998-001 Any data other than controller data

Other Controller data Controller SP5-801-xxx

SCS, IMH, MCS, Copier application, Fax application, Printer application, Scanner application, Web service/network application, NCS, R-Fax, DCS, UCS

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-63

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Executing Memory Clear on Basic Model

1. Upload the NVRAM data to a flash memory card (☛ 5.1.9). 2. Print out all SMC data lists (☛ 5.1.12).

NOTE: Be sure to print out all the lists. You have to manually change the SP settings if the NVRAM data upload ends abnormally.

3. Select SP5-801-002. 4. Press the OK key. 5. Select �Execute.� The messages �Execute?� followed by �Cancel� and

�Execute� are displayed. 6. Select �Execute.� 7. When the program has ended normally, the message �Completed� is displayed.

If the program has ended abnormally, an error message is displayed. 8. Press the cancel key. 9. Turn the main switch off and on. 10. Download the NVRAM data from a flash memory card (☛ 5.1.9). Executing Memory Clear on Other Models

1. Print out all SMC data lists (☛ 5.1.12). 2. Select SP5-801-002 (basic model) or SP5-998-001 (other models).

NOTE: SP5-998-001 clears the memory on the BICU. SP5-801-001 clears the memory on the controller.

3. Press the OK key. 4. Select �Execute.� The messages �Execute?� followed by �Cancel� and

�Execute� are displayed. 5. Select �Execute.� 6. When the program has ended normally, the message �Completed� is displayed.

If the program has ended abnormally, an error message is displayed. 7. Turn the main switch off and on. 8. Adjust the printer and scanner registration and magnification (☛ 3.14). 9. Refer to the SMC lists, and enter any values that differ from the factory

settings. Double-check the values for SP4-901. 10. Adjust the standard white level (SP4-428). 11. Initialize the TD sensor (SP 2-214). 12. Check the copy quality.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-64

5.1.6 INPUT CHECK (SP5-803)

Conducting Input Check

1. Select SP5-803. 2. Select the number (see the table below) corresponding to the component. 3. Select �Execute.� The copy mode is activated. 4. The sign �01H� or �00H� is displayed (see the table below). Input Check Table

Num. Sensor/Switch 1h 0h 001 Safety SW Open Closed 003 Right Cover SW Open Closed 005 Tray Cover SW Open Closed 006 Upper Relay S Paper detected Not detected 009 Registration Sensor Paper detected Not detected 010 Exit Sensor Paper detected Not detected 011 Duplex Inverter S Paper detected Not detected 014 By-pass PE S Paper detected Not detected 016 Upper PE S Paper detected Not detected 017 Lower PE S Paper detected Not detected 027 PCU Set Signal Installed Not installed 028 Optional Tray * * 030 Duplex Installed Installed Not installed 032 Main M Lock Locked Not locked 033 Polygon M Lock Locked Not locked 035 Total CO Install Installed Not installed 036 Key CO Install Installed Not installed 037 L-Synchronization Detected Not detected 039 DF-Cover Open S Detected Not detected 040 DF-Original Set S Detected Not detected 041 DF-Registration S Detected Not detected 045 Platen Cover S Open Closed 050 Fan Motor Lock (High speed) Locked (High speed) Not locked 052 Front Cover SW Open Closed 053 HP Sensor Detected Not detected

* Available Paper Feed Unit 00 None 30 1-tray paper feed unit

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-65

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5.1.7 OUTPUT CHECK (SP5-804)

Conducting Output Check CAUTION: To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an electrical

component on for a long time. 1. Select SP5-804. 2. Select the number (see the table below) corresponding to the component. 3. Select �ON.� 4. To stop the operation, select �OFF.� Output Check Table

Num. Component 001 Main Motor Forward 002 Main Motor Reverse 003 Quenching Lamp 004 Toner Supply Clutch Forward 005 Fan Motor High 006 Fan Motor Low 007 Registration Clutch 008 By-pass Feed Clutch 009 Upper Feed Clutch 010 Lower Feed Clutch 017 BK-Lift Motor 020 Duplex Inv Motor Reverse 021 Duplex Inv Motor Forward 024 Duplex Inv Motor Hold 026 Polygon Motor 027 Polygon M/LD 028 LD 029 DF-Transport Motor 031 DF-Feed Clutch 038 Fusing Solenoid 039 Fast Dup Inv M-Rev

When checking Fan Motor High (005) or Fan Motor Low (006) note the following: • These motors may not respond when the fusing temperature is high. • Selecting �ON� checks that one of these motors normally operates. Selecting

�OFF� turns off the motor that you have started by selecting �ON.� However, this does not guarantee that the motor normally stops during normal operation.

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-66

5.1.8 SERIAL NUMBER INPUT (SP5-811-001)

Specifying Characters SP5-811-001 specifies the serial number. For the basic model (the machine without the controller box), you use the numeric keypad. For other models (the machine with the controller box), you use the numeric keypad and the multi-function panel. Basic Model A serial number consists of 11 characters. You can change each character by pressing one of the first 11 keys on the numeric keypad (#, ), *, … +, #, $). For example, when you press the # key, the first character of the serial number changes as follows: 0 → 1 → 2 → … → 8 → 9 → A → B → … → X → Y → Z. When you press the ) key, the second character changes likewise. You can specify a digit (�0� to �9�) or a capital letter (�A� to �Z�) for the first four characters of a serial number, and you can specify a digit in the other seven characters (not capital letters). Other Models You use the numeric keypad to type numbers. In addition, you use the multi-function panel to type other characters. When you press the �ABC� key, the letter changes as follows: A → B → C. To input the same letter two times, for example �AA,� you press the �ABC� key, the �Space� key, and the �ABC� key. To switch between uppercase letters and lowercase letters, press the �Shift� key. Serial Number and NVRAM Serial numbers are stored in the NVRAM before shipment and are not cleared by any program. You must specify a serial number after you replace the NVRAM.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-67

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5.1.9 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD (SP5-824/825)

!CAUTION Make sure that you turn off the main power switch before inserting or removing a flash memory card. Data in the memory may be corrupted if you insert or remove the memory card with the main power switch on.

This section (5.1.9) is for the basic model (B129) only. This section illustrates how to copy the data from the BICU NVRAM to a memory card (☛ NVRAM Upload (SP5-824-001)) or from a memory card to the BICU NVRAM (☛ NVRAM Download (SP5-825-001)). For the workflow to copy the data in the controller NVRAM, see section 5.2.3. Overview You can copy the data from the NVRAM to a flash memory card (NVRAM Upload) or from a flash memory card to the NVRAM (NVRAM download). You should execute NVRAM Upload before replacing the NVRAM or before executing SP5-801-002 (Memory Clear > Engine ☛ 5.1.5). You can copy back the data from the flash memory card to the NVRAM as necessary. NVRAM Upload (SP5-824-001)

1. Turn off the main switch. 2. Remove the memory card cover [B] (% x

1). 3. Turn the face of the flash memory card

[A] (�A� is printed on it) to the rear of the copier, and insert it into the card slot [C].

4. Turn on the main power switch. 5. Activate the SP mode and select SP5-

824-001. 6. The copier overwrites the data in the

memory card with the data in the NVRAM. This takes about 20 seconds. If uploading fails, an error message appears. If an error message appears, retry the upload procedure.

7. Turn off the main power switch. 8. Remove the memory card.

SP5-824-1 (NVRAM Upload)

From the BICU to a flash memory card

SP5-825-1 (NVRAM Download)

From a flash memory card to the BICU

B130S901.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-68

NVRAM Download (SP5-825-001) SP5-825-001 copies the data from a flash memory card to the NVRAM. Most of the data in the NVRAM is overwritten. The following data in the NVRAM remains unchanged (these are not overwritten):

• SP8-221-001 (ADF Original Feed > Front) • SP8-381-001 (Total: Total Printer Pages) • SP8-382-001 (Copy Application: Total Print Pages) • SP8-411-001 (Prints/Duplex)

1. Turn off the main power switch. 2. Remove the memory card cover [B] (% x

1). 3. Turn the face of the flash memory card

[A] (�A� is printed on it) to the rear of the copier, and insert it into the card slot [C].

4. Turn on the main switch. 5. Activate the SP mode and select SP5-

825-001. 6. The copier overwrites the data in the

NVRAM with the data in the memory card. This takes about one second. If downloading fails, an error message appears. If an error message appears, retry the download procedure.

7. Turn off the main power switch. 8. Remove the memory card.

B130S901.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-69

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5.1.10 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR BASIC MODEL

This section (5.1.10) illustrates how to update the firmware of the basic model (the machine without the controller box). To update the firmware of the other models (the machine with the controller box), see section 5.2.

1. Turn the main power switch off. 2. Remove the memory card cover [B]

(% x 1). 3. Turn the face of the flash memory card

[A] (�A� is printed on it) to the rear of the copier, and insert it into the card slot [C].

4. Press down the power switch on the operation panel and hold it, and turn on the main power switch.

5. Press the �Execute� key [D]. The program starts running.

6. Do not touch any key while the message �Load Status…� is displayed. This message indicates that the program is running.

7. Check that the message �End Sum…� is displayed. This message indicates that the program has ended normally.

8. Turn off the main power switch. 9. Remove the flash memory card. 10. Attach the memory card cover. 11. Turn the main power switch on, and

check the operation.

B130S901.WMF

B130S904.WMF

B130S905.WMF

B130S906.WMF

COPY 5.827.001 Program Download

Execute

[D]

COPY 5.827.001 Program Download Load Status:&�&&&&&&&

Execute

COPY(Class3) 5.827.001 Program Download End Sum:&&&&H 0.20 EXP

[B]

[C]

[A]

SERVICE PROGRAM 9 March 2004

5-70

5.1.11 TEST PATTERN PRINT (SP5-902-001)

Executing Test Pattern Printing

1. Specify the pattern number and press the OK key. 2. Press the copy start key. The copy mode is activated (☛ �Activating Copy

Mode� in section 5.1.1). 3. Specify copy settings and press the ( key. 4. To return to the SP mode, press the » key. Test Patterns

Test Patterns Using VCU Test Patterns Using IPU No. Pattern No. Pattern 0 (No print) 30 Vertical Lines (Single Dot) 1 Vertical Lines (Single Dot) 31 Horizontal Lines (Single Dot) 2 Horizontal Lines (Single Dot) 32 Vertical Lines (Double Dot) 3 Vertical Lines (Double Dot) 33 Horizontal Lines (Double Dot) 4 Horizontal Lines (Double Dot) 34 Isolated Four Dots 5 Grid Pattern (Single Dot) 35 Grid Pattern (Double Dot) 6 Grid Pattern (Double Dot) 36 Black Band (Vertical, 1024 Dots) 7 Alternating Dot Pattern 37 Grayscales (Horizontal, 512 Dots) 8 Isolated One Dot 38 Grayscales (Vertical, 256 Dots) 9 Black Band (Horizontal) 39 ID Patch 10 Trimming Area 40 Cross 11 Argyle Pattern (Single Dot) 41 Argyle Pattern (128-Dot Pitch) 12 Grayscales (Horizontal) 42 Square Gradation (64 Grades) 13 Grayscales (Vertical) 43 Square Gradation (256 Grades) 14 Grayscales (Vertical/Horizontal) 44 Grayscales (Horizontal, 32-Dot Width) 15 Grayscales (Vertical/Horizontal Overlay) 45 Grayscales (Vertical, 32-Dot Width) 16 Grayscales With White Lines (Horizontal) 47 A4 Gradation Patches 1 (128 Grades) 17 Grayscales with White Lines (Vertical) 48 A4 Gradation Patches 2 (128 Grades)

49 Trimming Area (A4) 18 Grayscales with White Lines (Vertical/Horizontal)

Test Patterns Using SBU Test Patterns Using PCI*1

No. Pattern No. Pattern 51 Grid Pattern (double dot) 61 S2M: Grid Pattern 52 Gray Scale 1 (256 grades) 62 S2M: Argyle Pattern 53 Gray Scale 2 (256 grades) 63 S2M: Argyle Pattern 64 S2M: Argyle Pattern + Image*2 65 S2M: Grid Pattern 66 S2M: Grid Pattern + Image 67 S2M: Argyle Pattern 68 S2M: Argyle Patten + Image 69 Engine: Grid Pattern 70 Engine: Argyle Pattern

*1 The PCI is available to the models with the controller box. *2 The original image on the exposure glass is printed behind the test pattern.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM

5-71

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5.1.12 SMC PRINT (SP5-990)

SP5-990 outputs machine status lists.

1. Select SP5-990. 2. Select a menu:

• Basic model: 001 All, 002 SP, 003 User Program, 004 Logging Data, or 005 Big Font

• Other models: 001 All, 002 SP, 003 User Program, 004 Logging Data, 005 Diagnostic Report, 006 Non-Default, 007 NIB Summary, 021 Copier UP, 022 Scanner SP, 023 Scanner UP

NOTE: The output given by the menu �Big Font� is suitable for faxing. 3. Press the �Execute� key.

• Basic model: The copy mode is activated (☛ �Activating Copy Mode� in section 5.1.1). Specify copy settings and press the ( key. The machine status lists is output.

• Other models: The machine status list is output. 4. To return to the SP mode, press the » key.

FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE 9 March 2004

5-72

5.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE This section (5.2) illustrates how to update the firmware of the machines with the controller box. To update the firmware of the basic model (the machine without the controller box), see section 5.1.10.

To update the firmware, you must download the new version of the firmware to an SD Card (Secure Digital Card). You insert the SD Card into the lower slot on the side of the controller box. 5.2.1 HANDLING SD CARD

An SD card is a precision device. Use extreme caution: • Turn off the main power switch before inserting an SD card. Do not insert an SD

card into the slot with the power on. • After turning on the main power switch, do not remove the SD card from the slot. • Do not turn off the power switch while the data is downloaded. • Keep SD cards in a safe place. Do not expose SD cards to high temperature,

high humidity, or direct sunlight. • Do not bend or scratch an SD card. Do not drop an SD card or expose it to other

shock or vibration. 5.2.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

1. Turn off the main power switch. 2. Physically disconnect the copier from

the network. This prevents jobs from coming into the copier during firmware update.

3. Remove the slot cover [A] (% x 1) 4. Turn the label on the SD card [B] to the

rear side of the copier, and insert the SD card into the lower slot [C]. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place.

5. Make sure the SD card is locked in place. NOTE: To remove the SD card, push it

in to unlock it. 6. Turn the main power switch on. After about 10 seconds, the initial version

update screen appears on the LCD.

B130S902.WMF

[C]

[A]

[B]

9 March 2004 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

5-73

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

7. Select a module. • To scroll through the menus,

press the ‘ or ( key.

• To view the firmware version, press the ) key. �ROM� is the information on the current firmware. �NEW� is the information on the firmware in the SD card.

• To return to the menu, press the * key.

• To select the module, press the OK key. • To quit the firmware-update program, press the F3 key. • To select all modules, press the ( key. • To cancel the selection, press the & key. • To scroll through the module name, the serial number, and the version, press

the * key or ) key.

B130S907.WMF

B130S908.WMF

B130S909.WMF

B130S910.WMF

Program UpDate Menu P.01 ROM: B1234567A NEW: B1234567B

Exit

Program UpDate Menu P.02 Engine

Exit

Program UpDate Menu P.01 Printer

Exit

Program UpDate Menu P.01 Printer

Exit

FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE 9 March 2004

5-74

When you have selected a module, the text lines are highlighted, and the �Verify� key and the �Update� key are displayed.

8. Press the �Verify� key. 9. Check that the message

�Verify Done� is displayed. This indicates that the data is correct.

If the data is incorrect, the message �Verify Error� is displayed. Do not use incorrect data.

10. Turn the main switch off and on. 11. Select a module and press the

�Update� key. The firmware update program starts and the message �Loading� is displayed.

B130S911.WMF

B130S912.WMF

B130S913.WMF

B130S914.WMF

Program UpDate Menu P.01 ROM: B1234567A NEW: B1234567B

Exit Update Verify

Verify Done Engine Card No.: 1/1

Verify Error Engine Card No.: 1/1

Loading Engine

✽✽✽_ _ _ _ _ _ _

9 March 2004 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

5-75

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

12. Check that the message �Update Done� is displayed.

If an error occurs, the error code is displayed. For the information on the error codes, see the table.

Code Cause Necessary Action

E20 Physical address mapping error • Insert the SD card correctly. • Use another SD card

E22 Decompression error • Store correct data in the SD card.

E23 Update program error • Update controller program. • Replace the controller.

E24 SD card access error • Insert the SD card correctly. • Use another SD card.

E31 Download data inconsistency* • Insert the SD card that is used when the previous update procedure is interrupted.

E32 Download data inconsistency* • Insert the SD card that stores the correct data. E33 Version data error • Store the correct data in the SD card. E34 Locale data error • Store the correct data in the SD card. E35 Machine model data error • Store the correct data in the SD card. E36 Module data error • Store the correct data in the SD card.

E40 Engine program error** • Store the correct data in the SD card. • Replace BICU.

E42 Operation panel program error* • Store the correct data in the SD card. • Replace the operation panel board.

E44 Controller program error* • Store the correct data in the SD card. • Replace the controller board.

E50 Authentication error • Store the correct data in the SD card. * You need to reinstall the program.

If the firmware update program is interrupted, for example, by power failure, keep the SD card inserted and turn the mains switch off and on. The firmware update program restarts. If you do not do so, the message �Reboot after Card insert� is displayed when you turn the main switch on.

B130S915.WMF

B130S916.WMF

Update Done

Engine Card No.: 1/1

No Valid Data E24

Exit

FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE 9 March 2004

5-76

5.2.3 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

This section (5.2.3) is for the MFP model (B130), the copier/facsimile model (B168), and the copier/printer/scanner model (B169) only. This section illustrates how to copy the data from the controller NVRAM to an SD card (☛ Uploading NVRAM Data) or from an SD card to the controller NVRAM (☛ Downloading SD Card Data). For the workflow to copy the data in the BICU NVRAM, see section 5.1.9. NOTE: The procedure in this section does not upload or download the NVRAM

data on the BICU. See section 5.1.9 for the procedure to upload or download the NVRAM data on the BICU.

Uploading NVRAM Data You can copy the NVRAM data to an SD card.

1. Activate the SP mode. 2. Select SP5-990-001, and output the SMC report. You may need these data

when uploading fails. 3. Turn off the main power switch. 4. Insert the SD card into the lower slot. 5. Turn on the main power switch. 6. Activate the SP mode. 7. Select SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Upload). 8. Press the Execute key. The copier starts uploading and makes the following file

in the following folder: NVRAMserial_number.NV where �serial_number� is the serial number. If, for example, the serial number is �B0700017,� the folder name and the file name are as follows: NVRAMB0700017.NV

9. Make a label that indicates the contents of the SD card, and attach it to the SD card. NOTE: An SD card can store the NVRAM data of two or more machines.

9 March 2004 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

5-77

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Downloading SD Card Data You can copy the data from an SD card to the NVRAM.

1. Turn off the main power switch of the copier. 2. Insert the SD card into the lower slot. Make sure that the SD card is correctly

set. 3. Turn on the main power switch of the copier. 4. Activate the SP mode. 5. Select SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Download). 6. Press the Execute key. The copier starts downloading. When an error occurs, take the following actions:

1. Check the serial number of the data. You can find the serial number in the file name of the data (☛

2. Uploading NVRAM Data). 3. Retry the download procedure. 4. If downloading does not normally end, manually specify settings. See the SMC

report for the settings.

USER TOOLS 9 March 2004

5-78

5.3 USER TOOLS See Operating Instructions.

9 March 2004 PAPER PATH

6-1

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 6.1 PAPER PATH

1. Original Registration Sensor (Document

Feeder) 2. Original Set Sensor (Document Feeder) 3. Exit Sensor 4. Paper Path Sensor 5. Registration Sensor

6. By-pass Paper End Sensor 7. Paper Feed Sensor (Optional Tray) 8. Paper End Sensor (Optional Tray) 9. Paper End Sensor

B130D905.WMF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

DRIVE LAYOUT 9 March 2004

6-2

6.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Scanner Motor 2. Duplex motor 3. Exit Roller 4. DF Motor (Document Feeder) 5. Toner Bottle Clutch 6. Main Motor 7. Paper Feed Clutch

8. Bypass Feed Clutch (By-pass Tray)

9. Registration Clutch 10. Developer Driver Gear 11. Drum Drive Gear 12. One-way Gear (Duplex Unit) 13. Fusing Drive Gear

B130D904.WMF

1

10

6

13

115

78

9

3 2

12

4

9 March 2004 BLOCK DIAGRAM: PCBS AND COMPONENTS

6-3

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

6.3 BLOCK DIAGRAM: PCBs AND COMPONENTS

The table lists available units and components for each model.

Model Document Feeder

Printer/ Scanner Fax* Controller

Basic Model (B129) for North America

Standard Optional Not available Distributed with

the optional printer/scanner

Basic Model (B129) for Europe

Optional Not available Not available Not available

Basic Model (B129) for China/Asia

Optional Optional Not available Distributed with

the optional printer/scanner

Printer/Scanner Model (B169) Optional Standard Not available Standard

Fax Model (B168) Standard Not available Standard Standard

MFP Model (B130) Standard Standard Standard Standard

* You can install an optional handset to the fax unit. The table lists available interfaces for the printer/scanner unit.

Ethernet USB 2.0 IEEE 1284 IEEE 1394 Wireless LAN Bluetooth

Standard Standard Optional Optional Optional Optional

BICU

Sensors

ThermistorSBU FanMotor

Toner SupplyClutch

LampStabilizer

ExposureLamp

Motors (Main, Polygon,Scanner, Duplex)

DocumentFeeder

Paper TrayUnit

MechanicalCounter

SDRAMDIMMRS232CPSU

FCU

Handset

HVP Board

PS3DIMM

BypassFeed Clutch

RegistrationClutch

Paper FeedClutchPCU

LD Unit

OperationPanel

TrayHeater

FusingLamp

QuenchingLamp

Controller

USB IEEE 1284/IEEE 1394/Wireless LAN/Bluetooth

FusingSolenoid

Printer/ScannerSD Card

SpeakerMBU

Ethernet

B130D928.WMF

: Fax unit

: Printer/scanner unit

IMAGE PROCESSING STEPS FOR EACH MODE 9 March 2004

6-4

6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING STEPS FOR EACH MODE

Enab

led

Text

(Ref

lect

ion

Rat

io ID

Line

ar)

Text

(Ref

lect

ion

Rat

io ID

Lin

ear)

Phot

o (D

ensi

tyLi

near

)Ph

oto

(Den

sity

Line

ar)

Phot

o (D

ensi

tyLi

near

)Te

xt (R

efre

lcio

nR

atio

ID L

inea

rPh

oto

(Den

sity

Line

ar)

Enab

led

Enab

led

Enab

led

Pres

erve

dBa

ckgr

ound

Erro

rD

iffus

ion

Dis

able

d

Nor

mal

Wea

k

Pres

erve

dBa

ckgr

ound

Wea

k

Nor

mal

Nor

mal

Erro

rD

iffus

ion

Stro

ng

Nor

mal

Shar

p

Enab

led

Bina

ry

Enab

led

Enab

led

(DF

only

)

Text

(Ref

lect

ion

Rat

io ID

Lin

ear)

Enab

led

Enab

led

(DF

only

)

Enab

led

Wea

k

Dis

able

d

Enab

led

Enab

led

ADS

Enab

led

Enab

led

(DF

only

)

Enab

led

Enab

led

(DF

only

)

Enab

led

Enab

led

Enab

led

Erro

r Diff

usio

n

¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯

Unn

eede

dB

ackg

roun

dC

olor

edTe

xtN

orm

al P

ixel

Phot

oC

oars

e Pi

xel

Phot

oPh

otog

raph

sTe

xt P

riorit

yPh

oto

Prio

rity

Shar

pN

orm

al

Text

Phot

oSp

ecia

l

Shad

ing

Line

Cor

rect

ion

Whi

te L

ine

Cor

rect

ion

Blac

k Li

ne C

orre

ctio

n

Scan

ner g

Cor

rect

ion

Smal

l Sm

ooth

ing

Filte

r

Mai

n Sc

an M

agni

ficat

ion

Mirr

orin

g

Side

-to-s

ide

Reg

istra

tion

(Lef

t Sid

e)

MTF

Filt

er (E

dge)

MTF

Filt

er (S

olid

)

Smoo

thin

g Fi

lter

Inde

pend

ent D

ot E

rase

Line

Wid

th C

orre

ctio

n

ID g

Cor

rect

ion

Gra

duat

ion

Vide

o Pa

th C

ontro

l

FCI

Edge

Cor

rect

ion

Prin

ter g

Cor

rect

ion

ADS

SBU

Shad

ing

Cor

rect

ion

Mag

nific

atio

n

Filte

ring

VCU

Path

Con

trol

Imag

eC

orre

ctio

n

Gra

duat

ion

ADS

Nor

mal

Phot

o Pr

iorit

yTe

xt P

riorit

yPh

otog

raph

s

ADS

Nor

mal

Stro

ngSt

rong

Stro

ngN

orm

al

Nor

mal

Nor

mal

Stro

ngW

eak

Dis

able

dTh

ick

Shar

pN

orm

alN

orm

alPi

xel P

hoto

Coa

rse

Pixe

l Pho

to

Bina

ryEr

ror

Diff

usio

nD

ither

ing

(105

Lin

es)

Dith

erin

g(5

3 Li

nes)

Enab

led

Enab

led

NO

TE:T

he g

ray

area

mea

ns th

e se

tting

can

not b

e ch

ange

d us

ing

SP m

ode.

Enab

led

Enab

led

Enab

led

Enab

led

(DF

only

)

Enab

led

Enab

led

(DF

only

)

Enab

led

Wea

k(A

ll Ar

ea)

Nor

mal

Wea

k(A

ll Ar

ea)

Wea

k

Dis

able

d

Not

e

SP4-

941

SP4-

942

SP4-

922

Con

nect

ed w

ithM

TF fi

lter (

Edge

)

SP4-

930

SP4-

931

SP4-

928

SP4-

927

SP4-

926

(Erro

rdi

ffusi

on o

nly)

SP4-

923

Nor

mal

Nor

mal

Nor

mal

MTF

Filt

er (L

ow ID

)N

orm

alN

orm

alSP

4-93

2

Wea

k

Enab

led

B130D924.WMF

9 March 2004 LD SAFETY SWITCHES

6-5

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCHES

Safety switches are installed at the front and right doors to ensure technician and user safety and to prevent the laser beam from accidentally switching on during servicing. Opening of the front or right door opens the corresponding switch, cutting the power supply (+5VS) to the laser diode. The safety switches are installed on the +24V line coming from the power supply unit (PSU). The +24V supply must pass through these switches before converting into the +5VS power that drives the laser.

PSU

BICU

LD Drive Board

+5VE

GND

+24V

REG

LDPD

Vcc

LD

PD

M61880FP

+5VS

+5VS

Front/Right　DoorSwitches

B130D901.WMF

IMAGE TRANSFER CURRENT 9 March 2004

6-6

6.6 IMAGE TRANSFER CURRENT There are two transfer current levels: low and high.

1. Low level: Before image transfer starts, the high voltage supply board supplies +10µA to the transfer roller. This prevents the transfer roller from attracting any positively charged toner on the drum surface.

2. High level: During image transfer, the high voltage supply board supplies a high level current (see the table) to the transfer roller. This enables the transfer roller to attract toner onto the paper.

3. When the trailing edge of the paper has passed the transfer roller, the high voltage supply board stops supplying the transfer current. If the copier is printing more pages, the high voltage supply board supplies the low level current.

You can adjust these levels (☛ SP2-301). When increasing a transfer current level, use caution: • Increasing a transfer current level may produce ghost images�some part of

image near the leading edge reappears in other part of the page. • Increasing a transfer current level might damage the OPC drum. The table lists the default settings and SPs.

Job type amp SP Normal paper 0 µA SP2-301-001 Thick paper 0 µA SP2-301-002 Duplex copying 0 µA SP2-301-003

9 March 2004 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

6-7

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

6.7 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 6.7.1 OVERVIEW

1. Exit Roller 2. Paper Path Sensor 3. Hot Roller Strippers 4. Pressure Spring 5. Pressure Roller

6. Fusing Lamp 7. Hot Roller 8. Thermoswitch 9. Thermistor 10. Exit Sensor

B130D903.WMF

1

10

3

5

4

6

8

7

9

2

IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 9 March 2004

6-8

6.7.2 HOT ROLLER DRIVE

Contact-release solenoid off Contact-release solenoid on Mechanism The main motor [A] drives the hot roller [D] through a gear train. One of the gears in the gear train is the contact-release gear [B]. This gear is linked to the contact-release solenoid [C]. When the contact-release solenoid is on, it separates the contact-release gear from another gear [E] in the gear train. As a result, the drive power of the main motor is not transmitted to the hot roller. NOTE: The drive power of the main motor is not transmitted to the paper exit roller

[F]. This roller is driven by the duplex motor. Contact/Release Control The contact-release solenoid turns on when the following conditions are all met: • The copier is warming up the hot roller. • The hot roller temperature is 16°C or higher. • The fusing idling (SP1-103-001) is �No.�

This control is based on the following facts:

• The copier takes a shorter time to heat the hot roller when the roller is not turning. • The temperature of the hot roller surface may become uneven when the hot

roller temperature is low and the roller is not turning.

B130D902.WMF

[A]

[D]

[B]

[C]

[E]

[F]

9 March 2004 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

6-9

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

6.7.3 PRESSURE ROLLER

The pressure springs [A] constantly press the pressure roller [B] against the hot roller [C]. As the default, the springs are positioned at the end [D]. If necessary, pressure can be decreased by changing the springs to position [E]. 6.7.4 PRESSURE RELEASE

When right door opens, part [A] (on each side) pulls open catch [B] (on each side), releasing pressure on the pressure roller, so that it can turn freely to allow removal of jams. When right door closes, part [C] pushes catch [B] closed, restoring normal pressure. 6.7.5 SEPARATION The hot roller stripper pawls [A] prevent paper from sticking to the hot roller.

B130D929.WMF

B130D930.WMF

B130D906.WMF

[E]

[B] [C]

[D]

[A]

[A]

[B]

[C] [B]

[A]

IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT 9 March 2004

6-10

6.7.6 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Control Process The BICU references the signal from the thermistor [A] every one seconds. The BICU turns on and off the fusing lamp or keeps it on or off, considering the following factors: • Current temperature • Target fusing temperature Target Temperature The table lists the target temperatures. You can change these targets by the listed programs. NOTE: For the fusing temperature transition during copying, see Temperature

Transition. Status/Condition Temperature SP

Warming up 160°C SP1-105-001 Ready 150°C SP1-105-003

Copying 160°C SP1-105-005 Low level 60°C SP1-105-007

Thick paper 165°C SP1-105-009

Temperature Transition When the fusing unit is cool, the fusing temperature should be higher to ameliorate the fusing quality. During copying, the fusing temperature is controlled as listed in the table. �Default� is the target fusing temperature by default (SP1-105-005: 160°C). �Example� is the target fusing temperature of the case where you specify �165°C� in SP1-105-005.

Start key pushed (➀)

For one second (➁)

30 seconds later (➂)

60 seconds later (➃)

Default 175°C 170°C 165°C 160°C Example 180°C 175°C 170°C 165°C

Difference from SP1-105-005 +15°C +10°C +5°C �

Copy SP1-105-005 adjusts the fusing temperature of the fourth phase (➃). You cannot directly adjust the fusing temperature in the first three phases (➀ through ➂). They are always higher than the fourth phase (➃) by 15°C, 10°C, and 5°C respectively.

B130D907.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]

9 March 2004 IMAGE FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

6-11

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

Overheat Protection The BICU references the fusing temperature through the thermistor [A]. The copier prevents overheating as listed below. Normally, Feature 1 is effective in preventing overheating. Features 2 through 3 are fail-safe features. Feature 1: The BICU turns off the fusing lamp when the fusing temperature is too high. Feature 2: The BICU disables the machine operation when the thermistor detects an abnormal temperature transition. In a case like this, the copier displays one of the following SC codes (☛ 4.1.2): SC543, SC544, SC545, SC546. NOTE: If the fusing temperature is too low, SC542 is displayed.

Feature 3: The BICU disables the machine operation when the thermistor does not normally work. In a case like this, the copier displays SC541 (☛ 4.1.2). Feature 4: The thermoswitch near the center [B] cuts the power supply to the fusing lamp at 160°C; the thermoswitch near the end [C] cuts the power supply to the fusing lamp at 170°C. These thermoswitches and the fusing lamp are on the same circuit.

NOTE: 1) Thermoswitch temperature is somewhat lower than the fusing temperature.

2) The thermoswitch near the center does not necessarily work earlier than the other thermoswitch. The ends of the hot roller can be much hotter than the center when, for example, the paper of a small size is continuously going through the fusing unit.

Feature 5: The BICU disables the machine operation when the exhaust fan does not normally work. In a case like this, the copier displays SC590 (☛ 4.1.2). Note that defective exhaust fans may cause overheating.

DUPLEX UNIT 9 March 2004

6-12

6.8 DUPLEX UNIT 6.8.1 IMPORTANT COMPONENT

The following components play important roles in duplex printing: • The duplex motor drives the exit

roller [A] and duplex roller [D]. • One of the paper guides on the

fusing unit [C] is linked to the paper path sensor [B].

NOTE: You cannot use the by-pass tray for duplex printing.

6.8.2 DUPLEX PRINTING PROCESS

The copier processes duplex printing as follows:

1. The controller starts to operate the main motor and duplex motor.

2. The hot roller [A] and pressure roller [B] transport the paper to the paper guide [C].

3. The leading edge of the paper pushes the paper guide; the paper guide turns the paper path sensor [D] on.

4. When the leading edge of the paper reaches the exit roller [E], the exit roller transports the paper.

B130D908.WMF

B130D910.WMF

[A] [B]

[C]

[D]

[A]

[B]

[C][D] [E]

9 March 2004 DUPLEX UNIT

6-13

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

5. When the trailing edge of the paper exits from the paper guide, the paper guide drops to the original position [A] and turns the paper path sensor [B] off.

6. The controller starts to operate the duplex motor in reverse; the exit roller [C] turns in reverse, transporting the paper to the duplex roller.

7. The paper goes over the paper guide and reaches the duplex roller [D].

8. The duplex roller transports the paper into the duplex unit. The paper goes through the unit.

9. When the leading edge of the paper reaches the registration sensor [E], the controller stops the duplex motor. The duplex roller holds the paper in the duplex unit.

10. When the OPC drum [F] gets ready for printing, the controller restarts the duplex motor. The duplex roller transports the paper.

11. The duplex roller keeps transporting the paper until the paper reaches the fusing unit.

12. The hot and pressure rollers transport the paper to the paper guide.

B130D911.WMF

B130D912.WMF

[A] [B][C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

DUPLEX UNIT 9 March 2004

6-14

13. The leading edge of the paper pushes the paper guide [A]; the paper guide turns the paper path sensor [B] on.

14. The controller changes the direction of the duplex motor. The exit roller [C] changes the direction of its rotation, transporting the paper to the copy tray.

B130D909.WMF

[B] [A] [C]

9 March 2004 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF BASIC MACHINES

6-15

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

6.9 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF BASIC MACHINES This section (6.9) illustrates the energy saver modes of the basic machine (the machine without the controller box). For the energy saver modes of the other models (the machines with the controller box), see section 6.10.

Overview

The machine has two energy-saver modes: the Low Power Mode and the Night/Off Mode. The table lists the status of several components.

Operation panel Engine Exhaust fan Operating Mode* On On On Low Power Mode Off On Off Night/Off Mode Off Off** Off

* The �Operating Mode� here refers to all the modes (and status) other than the Low Power Mode and Night/Off Mode. Actual power consumption (during the Operating Mode) depends on job status and environmental conditions.

** The SRAM is alive and backs up the engine controller.

B130D931.WMF

Power consumption

Operating Mode

Low Power Mode

Night/Off Mode

Time Energy Saver Timer

Auto Off Timer

t0

ENERGY SAVER MODES OF BASIC MACHINES 9 March 2004

6-16

AOF When AOF is off, the engine controller is unable to start the Night/Off Mode. The user should keep AOF on (! → System Settings → Key Operator Tools → AOF). Timers The engine controller references the Energy Saver Timer to start the Low Power Mode, and references the Auto Off Timer to start the Night/Off Mode. The user can set these timers (!→ System Settings → Timer Settings).

The Energy Saver Timer and the Auto Off Timer start at the same time (t0) when the machine ends all jobs or when the user ends all manual operations. Note that the Auto Off Timer does not wait for the Energy Saver Timer. If the user specifies a larger value in the Energy Saver Timer, the Auto Off Timer expires earlier than the Energy Saver Timer. In a case like this, the Low Power Mode is not activated. Instead, the engine controller starts the Night/Off Mode when the Auto Off Timer expires.

Specified value Low Power Mode Night/Off Mode Energy Saver Timer > Auto Off Timer Cannot start Can start Energy Saver Timer = Auto Off Timer Cannot start Can start Energy Saver Timer < Auto Off Timer Can start Can start

Recovery Any of the following operations brings the machine back to the Operating Mode:

• The power switch is pressed. • Originals are set on the document feeder. • The platen cover is opened.

9 March 2004 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF MFP MACHINES

6-17

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

6.10 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF MFP MACHINES This section (6.10) illustrates the energy saver modes of the models with the controller box. For the energy saver modes of the basic machine (the machine without the controller box), see section 6.9.

Overview

The machine has three energy-saver modes: the Low Power Mode, the Transit Mode, and the Night/Off Mode. The Transit Mode continues for about two seconds (probably, the user does not recognize this mode when it occurs). The table lists the status of several components.

Operation panel Engine Exhaust fan Operating Mode* On On On Low Power Mode Off On Off Transit Mode Off On Off Night/Off Mode Off Off** Off

* The �Operating Mode� here refers to all the modes (or status) other than the Low Power Mode and Night/Off Mode. Actual power consumption (during the Operating Mode) depends on job status and environmental conditions.

** The SRAM is alive and backs up the engine controller.

AOF See �AOF� in section 6.9.

B130D932.WMF

Power consumption

Operating Mode

Low Power Mode

Night/Off Mode

Time Energy Saver Timer

Auto Off Timer

Transit Mode

2 seconds t0

System AutoReset Timer

ENERGY SAVER MODES OF MFP MACHINES 9 March 2004

6-18

Timers The Energy Saver Timer and Auto Off Timer start at the same time (t0) when the machine ends all jobs, when the user ends all manual operations, or when the controller starts the default application program (the program specified by the user [!→ System Settings → General Features → Function Priority]). The default application program starts when the System Auto Reset Timer expires (!→ System Settings → Timer Settings → System Auto Reset Timer).

For more information, see �Timers� in section 6.9. Recovery Any of the following operations brings the machine back to the Operating Mode:

• The power switch is pressed. • Originals are set on the document feeder. • The platen cover is opened. • The controller receives a job over the network or the telephone line. • An SC code is generated.

9 March 2004 SPECIFICATIONS

SPEC-1

Spec

.

SPECIFICATIONS 1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.1 COPIER

Configuration: Desktop Copy Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system Originals: Sheet/Book/Object Original Size: Maximum

A4 / 81/2″ x 11″ A4 / 81/2″ x 14″ (ADF)

Copy Paper Size: Maximum A4 SEF / 81/2″ x 11″ SEF (Copier’s paper tray) A4 SEF / 81/2″ x 14″ SEF (Bypass) A4 SEF / 81/2″ x 14″ SEF (Optional paper tray) A4 SEF / 81/2″ x 14″ SEF (Duplex) Minimum A5 LEF / 81/2″ x 51/2″ LEF (Copier’s paper tray) A6 SEF/ 81/2″ x 51/2″ (Bypass) A4 SEF / 81/2″ x 11� SEF (Optional paper tray unit) A4 SEF / 81/2″ x 11� SEF (Duplex) Custom sizes in the bypass tray: Width: 90 � 216 mm (3.5″ � 8.5″) Length: 139 � 356 mm (5.48″ � 14.0″)

Copy Paper Weight: Standard paper tray; optional paper tray: 60 � 90 g/m2, 16 � 24 lb. Bypass: 60 � 157 g/m2, 16 � 42 lb. Duplex: 64 � 90 g/m2, 20 � 24 lb.

Reproduction Ratios: 2 enlargement and 3 reduction

A4 Version LT Version

Enlargement 200% 141%

155% 129%

Full Size 100% 100%

Reduction 93% 71% 50%

93% 78% 65%

Zoom: 50% to 200%, in 1% steps Power Source: 120 V, 60 Hz or 220 � 240 V, 50/60 Hz

SPECIFICATIONS 9 March 2004

SPEC-2

Power Consumption: Maximum: 1 kW or less Energy Saver: 10W or less Off Mode: 1 W or less

Noise Emission: Sound Power Level

Standby 40 dB(A) or less Operating (copier only) 62 dB(A) or less Operating (full-system) 66 dB(A) or less

Dimensions (W x D x H) Copier: 468 x 450 x 371 mm (18.4″ x 17.7″ x 14.6″) With optional paper tray unit: 468 x 450 x 511 mm (18.4″ x 17.7″ x 20.1″)

Weight: Basic: 22 kg (48.5 lb.) or less Basic with ADF: 24 kg (52.9 lb.) or less CPS model 23 kg (50.7 lb.) or less CF/MFP model: 25 kb (55.1 lb.) or less

Resolution: 600 dpi Copying Speed in Multicopy Mode (copies/minute):

15 (A4 / 81/2″ x 11″; 100%)

Warm-up Time: Basic: 15 seconds or less (at 20°C [68°F]) Other: Approximately 30 seconds (at 20°C [68°F])

First Copy Time: 7.5 seconds or less NOTE: Measurement conditions

1) From the ready state, with the polygonal mirror motor spinning.

2) A4/LT copying 3) From copier’s paper tray 4) 100% size

Copy Number Input: Numeric keypad, 1 to 99 (increment, decrement) Manual Image Density: 5 steps Auto Off Timer Default: 1 minute

Range: 1 to 240 minutes Energy Saver Timer: Default: 1 minute

Rage: 1 to 240 minutes

Copy Paper Capacity: Paper Tray: 250 sheets Optional Paper Tray Unit: 500 sheets x 1 Bypass Tray: 100 sheets

9 March 2004 SPECIFICATIONS

SPEC-3

Spec

.

Copy-Tray Capacity 250 sheets Toner Replenishment: Cartridge replacement (230 g/cartridge)

Toner Yield 7k copies /toner bottle (A4, 6% full black)

Optional Equipment: • Auto document feeder • Paper tray unit • Anti-condensation heater for paper tray unit

1.2 FAX See the Fax Service Manual. 1.3 PRINTER AND SCANNER See the Printer/Scanner Unit Service Manual. 1.4 ADF

Original Size: Standard: A4 to A5; 81/2″ x 14″ to 81/2″ x 51/2″ Custom: Width: 139 mm to 216 mm Length: 139 mm to 356 mm

Original Weight: 52�105 g/m2 (14�28 lb.) Table Capacity: 30 sheets (80 g/m2, 21 lb.) Original Standard Position: Center Separation: FRR Transport: Roller transport Feed Order: Top first Reproduction Range: 50�200% Power Source: 24 and 5 Vdc from the copier Power Consumption: Operating: 50 W or less

On standby: 1.2 W or less Dimensions (W x D x H): 110 x 360 x 95 mm (4.3″ x 14.2″ x 3.7″) Weight: 2 kg (4.4 lb) (excluding the original table and platen

cover)

SPECIFICATIONS 9 March 2004

SPEC-4

2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZE 2.1 ORIGINAL PAPER SIZE

The copier and ADF do not detect original paper sizes. The table lists the paper sizes that the ADF can transport.

Paper Size (W x L) A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm O B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm O A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm X A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm O B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm X B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm O A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm X A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm X B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm O B6 LEF 182 x 128 mm O A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm O 8K SEF 267 x 390 mm O 16K SEF 195 x 267 mm X 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm O DLT SEF 11.0″ x 17.0″ O LG SEF 8.5″ x 14.0″ X* LT SEF 8.5″ x 11.0″ X LT LEF 11.0″ x 8.5″ O Executive SEF 7.25″ x 10.5″ O HLT SEF 5.5″ x 8.5″ X HLT LEF 8.5″ x 5.5″ X F/GL (F4) SEF 8.0″ x 13.0″ X* Foolscap SEF 8.5″ x 13.0″ X* Folio SEF 8.25″ x 13.0″ X* Government 8.25″ x 14″ X* USB4 SEF 10.0″ x 14.0″ O Eng Quarto SEF 8.0″ x 10.0″ O Eng Quarto LEF 10.0″ x 8.0″ O Custom:Leading edge 139-216 mm Side edge 139-356 mm O

SIGN: X: Can use O: Cannot use *: Can use when the ADF is installed

9 March 2004 SPECIFICATIONS

SPEC-5

Spec

.

2.2 PAPER FEED

The copier and optional paper feed unit do not detect paper sizes. The table lists the paper sizes that the copier and optional paper feed unit can transport.

Paper Size (W x L) Regular By-pass Duplex Optional PFU

A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm O O O O B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm O O O O A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm X X X X A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm O O O O B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm X X X O B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm O O O O A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm O X O O A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm X X O O B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm O O O O B6 LEF 182 x 128 mm O O O O A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm O O O O 8K SEF 267 x 390 mm O O O O 16K SEF 195 x 267 mm X X X O 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm O O O O DLT SEF 11.0″ x 17.0″ O O O O LG SEF 8.5″ x 14.0″ O X X X LT SEF 8.5″ x 11.0″ X X X X LT LEF 11.0″ x 8.5″ O O O O Executive SEF 7.25″ x 10.5″ O X O O HLT SEF 5.5″ x 8.5″ O X O O HLT LEF 8.5″ x 5.5″ X X O O F/GL (F4) SEF 8.0″ x 13.0″ O X O O Foolscap SEF 8.5″ x 13.0″ O X X X Folio SEF 8.25″ x 13.0″ O X X X Government 8.25″ x 14″ O X X X USB4 SEF 10.0″ x 14.0″ O O O O Eng Quarto SEF 8.0″ x 10.0″ O O O O Eng Quarto LEF 10.0″ x 8.0″ O O O O Custom:.Leading edge 90�216 mm Side edge 139�356 mm O X O O

SIGN: X: Can transport O: Cannot transport

SPECIFICATIONS 9 March 2004

SPEC-6

3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION 3.1 BASIC MODEL (B129)

Standard Component Machine Code Remarks

1 Copier [M] B129 Optional Component Machine Code Remarks

2 500-Sheet Paper Feed Unit [L] B421 3 Printer/Scanner Unit B683 • Not available to Europe GW Controller Board [D] � SD Card [J] � • Application programs 128-MB Memory [K] � USB Interface Board [I] � Multi-function Panel [N] �

4 PostScript 3 [C] B681 5 IEEE 1394 Interface Board [E] B581 6 IEEE 1284 Interface Board [F] B679 7 Wireless LAN Interface Board [G] B682 8 Bluetooth Interface Board [H] G377

• Requires 3 • Not available to Europe

Standard/Optional Component Machine Code Remarks

9 ADF B696 Feeder [A] � Original Table [B] �

• Standard for North America • Optional for others

B130V906.WMF

[A]

[N]

[L]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[C]

[I] [J] [K]

[B]

[M]

9 March 2004 SPECIFICATIONS

SPEC-7

Spec

.

3.2 COPIER/PRINTER/SCANNER MODEL (B169)

Standard Component Machine Code Remarks

1 Copier [M] B169 Printer/Scanner Unit � GW Controller Board [D] � SD Card [J] � • Application programs 128-MB Memory [K] � USB Interface Board [I] � Multi-function Panel [N] � Optional Component Machine Code Remarks

2 ADF B696 Feeder [A] � Original Table [B] �

3 500-Sheet Paper Feed Unit [L] B421 4 PostScript 3 [C] B681 5 IEEE 1394 Interface Board [E] B581 6 IEEE 1284 Interface Board [F] B679 7 Wireless LAN Interface Board [G] B682 8 Bluetooth Interface Board [H] G377

B130V906.WMF

[A]

[N]

[L]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[C]

[I] [J] [K]

[B]

[M]

SPECIFICATIONS 9 March 2004

SPEC-8

3.3 COPIER/FAX MODEL (B168)

Standard Component Machine Code Remarks

1 Copier [F] B168 ADF � Feeder [A] � Original Table [B] � Fax Unit � GW Controller Board [D] � Fax Controller Unit [C] � Multi-function Panel [G] � Optional Component Machine Code Remarks

2 500-Sheet Paper Feed Unit [E] B421 3 Handset [H] B433 • For North America only

B130V907.WMF

[A]

[H]

[G]

[E]

[C]

[D]

[B]

[F]

9 March 2004 SPECIFICATIONS

SPEC-9

Spec

.

3.4 MFP MODEL (B130)

Standard Component Machine Code Remarks

1 Copier [N] B130 ADF � Feeder [A] � Original Table [B] � Fax/Printer/Scanner Unit � GW Controller Board [D] � Fax Controller Unit [E] � SD Card [K] � • Application programs 128-MB Memory [L] � USB Interface Board [J] � Multi-function Panel [O] � Optional Component Machine Code Remarks

2 500-Sheet Paper Feed Unit [M] B421 3 PostScript 3 [C] B681 4 IEEE 1394 Interface Board [F] B581 5 IEEE 1284 Interface Board [G] B679 6 Wireless LAN Interface Board [H] B682 7 Bluetooth Interface Board [I] G377 8 Handset [P] B433 • For North America only

B130V908.WMF

[A]

[P]

[O]

[M]

[E]

[F]

[H]

[G]

[I]

[D]

[J][K][L]

[B]

[N]

[C]

SPECIFICATIONS 9 March 2004

SPEC-10

4. OPTION 4.1 PRINTER/SCANNER UNIT

See the Printer/Scanner Unit Service Manual. 4.2 ADF

Same as the standard ADF (☛ 1.4) 4.3 PAPER FEED UNIT

Paper Sizes: A4 SEF, 81/2″ x 11″ SEF, 81/2″ x 13″ SEF, 81/2″ x 14″ SEF

Paper Weight: 60�90 g/m2, 16�24 lb. Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 21 lb. ) x 1 tray Paper Feed System: Feed roller and friction pad Power Source: 24 Vdc and 5 Vdc, from copier. If optional tray heater is

installed, the copier also supplies Vac (120 Vac or 220�240 Vac).

Power Consumption: Maximum: 15 W (excluding optional tray heater) Average: 14 W (excluding optional tray heater)

Weight: Not above 6 kg (13.2. lb.) Size (W x D x H): 430 x 414 x 140 mm (16.9″ x 16.3″ x 5.5″)

Model S-C2 FAX

(For B130/B168 only)

SERVICE MANUAL

9 March 2004Subject to change

Conventions in this Manual This manual uses several symbols.

Symbol What it means ☛ Refer to section number ! See Core Tech Manual for details » Screw # Connector $ E-ring % Clip ring

Long Edge Feed (LEF)Short Edge Feed (SEF)

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INSTALLATION………………………………………………………………… 1-1 1.1 INITIALIZING FACSIMILE ……………………………………………………………… 1-1

Initializing Application Program …………………………………………………… 1-1 Initializing Address Book ……………………………………………………………. 1-1

1.2 OPTIONAL HANDSET…………………………………………………………………… 1-2 1.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK…………………………………………………………… 1-2 1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE……………………………………………….. 1-3

2. TROUBLESHOOTING……………………………………………………….. 2-1 2.1 ERROR CODES …………………………………………………………………………… 2-1 2.2 FAX SC CODES …………………………………………………………………………… 2-8

2.2.1 SC1201……………………………………………………………………………….. 2-8 2.2.2 OTHER SC CODES………………………………………………………………. 2-8 2.2.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE ………………………………………………………….. 2-8

2.3 INCORRECT ADDRESS BOOK……………………………………………………… 2-9

3. SERVICE TABLES……………………………………………………………. 3-1 3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE…………………………………………………………. 3-1

3.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION……………………………… 3-1 Activating Fax SP Mode…………………………………………………………….. 3-1 Quitting Fax SP mode ……………………………………………………………….. 3-1 SP2-XXX (RAM)……………………………………………………………………….. 3-2 SP3-XXX (Machine Set)…………………………………………………………….. 3-3 SP4-XXX (ROM Versions) …………………………………………………………. 3-3 SP5-XXX (RAM Clear) ………………………………………………………………. 3-4 SP6-XXX (Reports) …………………………………………………………………… 3-4 SP7-XXX (Tests)………………………………………………………………………. 3-5

3.2 BIT SWITCHES ……………………………………………………………………………. 3-6 3.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ……………………………………………………………. 3-6 3.2.2 IFAX SWITCHES ………………………………………………………………….3-17 3.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES …………………………………………………………..3-17 3.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES……………………………………………..3-22 3.2.5 G3-1 SWITCHES ………………………………………………………………….3-27 3.2.6 FAX SWITCHES …………………………………………………………………..3-35

3.3 NCU PARAMETERS …………………………………………………………………….3-36 3.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ………………………………..3-45

3.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE …………………………………………….3-45 3.4.2 PARAMETERS …………………………………………………………………….3-46

3.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES ………………………………………………………..3-49 3.6 BACKUP OF DIRECTORY INFORMATION……………………………………..3-57

3.6.1 OVERVIEW………………………………………………………………………….3-57 SP Mode …………………………………………………………………………………3-57 Folder and File Format………………………………………………………………3-57

3.6.2 REQUIREMENTS …………………………………………………………………3-58 3.6.3 LIMITATION…………………………………………………………………………3-59

ii

Overview …………………………………………………………………………………3-59 SP5-846-003 (Maximum Entries) ………………………………………………..3-59 Group ……………………………………………………………………………………..3-59

3.6.4 UPLOADING DIRECTORY INFORMATION……………………………..3-60 3.6.5 COPYING DIRECTORY INFORMATION TO COMPUTER…………3-61 3.6.6 DOWNLOADING DIRECTORY INFORMATION ……………………….3-62 3.6.7 POSSIBLE ERROR ………………………………………………………………3-63

Some Examples ……………………………………………………………………….3-63 Incomplete Download………………………………………………………………..3-63 SC Code …………………………………………………………………………………3-63

4. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS………………………………… 4-1 4.1 OVERVIEW …………………………………………………………………………………. 4-1 4.2 BOARDS……………………………………………………………………………………… 4-2

4.2.1 FCU ……………………………………………………………………………………. 4-2 4.2.2 MBU……………………………………………………………………………………. 4-3

SPECIFICATIONS………………………………………………………….. SPEC-1 1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS…………………………………………………….SPEC-1 2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS ……………………………..SPEC-2 3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION ……………………………………………………SPEC-2

9 March 2004 INITIALIZING FACSIMILE

1-1

Inst

alla

tion1. INSTALLATION

1.1 INITIALIZING FACSIMILE Initializing Application Program When you press the Fax key for the first time after installation, an error occurs. This is not a functional problem. Press OK. The fax starts its initialization program.

NOTE: If another error occurs after initialization, this can be a functional problem. Initializing Address Book After you change the setting extension/outside, turn the main power switch off and on (☛ 2.3).

OPTIONAL HANDSET 9 March 2004

1-2

1.2 OPTIONAL HANDSET The optional handset is for the North America model only. 1.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check that you have the components and accessories.

No. Description Q�ty 1 Handset 1 2 Handset cradle 1 3 Screws 2 4 Handset manual 1

NOTE: The handset bracket is not included in the optional handset kit. The bracket is provided as an accessory of the copier.

B130I908.WMF

1

2

3

9 March 2004 OPTIONAL HANDSET

1-3

Inst

alla

tion

1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Attach the handset bracket [A] (! x 2). NOTE: The bracket is an

accessory of the copier. 2. Remove the label [B] from the

handset cradle [C]. 3. Attach the cradle to the bracket

(! x 2). 4. Reattach the label. 5. Set the handset [D] on the cradle. 6. Connect the cable [E] to the TEL

jack at the left side of the copier.

B130I906.WMF

B130I907.WMF

[C]

[B]

[A]

[D]

[E]

9 March 2004 ERROR CODES

2-1

Trou

ble-

shoo

ting

2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.1 ERROR CODES When a communication error occurs, retry to establish the communication. If the error recurs, see the tables below and solve the problem. Note that some error codes are seen only in the printed reports.

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 0-00 DIS/NSF not detected within

40 s of Start being pressed • Check the line connection. • The machine at the other end may be

incompatible. • Replace the FCU. • Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope. • If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.

0-01 DCN received unexpectedly • The other party is out of paper or has a jammed printer.

• The other party pressed Stop during communication.

0-03 Incompatible modem at the other end

• The other terminal is incompatible.

0-04 CFR or FTT not received after modem training

• Check the line connection. • Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer

settings. • Replace the FCU. • The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to

another machine. • If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be

a bad line. Cross reference • Tx level — NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN) • Cable equalizer — G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) • Dedicated Tx parameters — Section 4

0-05 Unsuccessful after modem training at 2400 bps

• Check the line connection. • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer. • Replace the FCU. • Check for line problems. Cross reference • See error code 0-04.

0-06 The other terminal did not reply to DCS

• Check the line connection. • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer

settings. • Replace the FCU. • The other end may be defective or incompatible;

try sending to another machine. • Check for line problems. Cross reference • See error code 0-04.

ERROR CODES 9 March 2004

2-2

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 0-07 No post-message response

from the other end after a page was sent

• Check the line connection. • Replace the FCU. • The other end may have jammed or run out of

paper. • The other end user may have disconnected the

call. • Check for a bad line. • The other end may be defective; try sending to

another machine. 0-08 The other end sent RTN or

PIN after receiving a page, because there were too many errors

• Check the line connection. • Replace the FCU. • The other end may have jammed, or run out of

paper or memory space. • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer

settings. • The other end may have a defective

modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another machine.

• Check for line problems and noise. Cross reference • Tx level — NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN) • Cable equalizer — G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) • Dedicated Tx parameters — Section 4

0-14 Non-standard post message response code received

• Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try sending to another machine.

• Noisy line: resend. • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer

settings. • Replace the FCU. Cross reference • See error code 0-08.

0-15 The other terminal is not capable of specific functions.

The other terminal is not capable of accepting the following functions, or the other terminal�s memory is full. • Confidential rx • Transfer function • SEP/SUB/PWD/SID

0-16 CFR or FTT not detected after modem training in confidential or transfer mode

• Check the line connection. • Replace the FCU. • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer

settings. • The other end may have disconnected, or it may

be defective; try calling another machine. • If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a

line problem. Cross reference • See error code 0-08.

9 March 2004 ERROR CODES

2-3

Trou

ble-

shoo

ting

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 0-17 Communication was

interrupted by pressing the Stop key.

If the Stop key was not pressed and this error keeps occurring, replace the operation panel.

0-20 Facsimile data not received within 6 s of retraining

• Check the line connection. • Replace the FCU. • Check for line problems. • Try calling another fax machine. • Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first

line and/or rx cable equalizer setting. Cross reference • Reconstruction time — G3 Switch 0A, bit 6 • Rx cable equalizer — G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line) from the other end not received within 5 s of the previous EOL signal

• Check the connections between the FCU & line. • Check for line noise or other line problems. • Replace the FCU. • The remote machine may be defective or may

have disconnected. Cross reference • Maximum interval between EOLs and between

ECM frames — G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4 0-22 The signal from the other

end was interrupted for more than the acceptable modem carrier drop time (default: 200 ms)

• Check the line connection. • Replace the FCU. • Defective remote terminal. • Check for line noise or other line problems. • Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop

time. Cross reference • Acceptable modem carrier drop time — G3 Switch

0A, bits 0 and 1 0-23 Too many errors during

reception • Check the line connection. • Replace the FCU. • Defective remote terminal. • Check for line noise or other line problems. • Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level. • Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or

rx error criteria. Cross reference • Rx cable equalizer — G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) • Rx error criteria — Communication Switch 02, bits

0 and 1 0-30 The other terminal did not

reply to NSS(A) in AI short protocol mode

• Check the line connection. • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer

settings. • The other terminal may not be compatible. Cross reference • Dedicated tx parameters — Section 4

ERROR CODES 9 March 2004

2-4

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 0-32 The other terminal sent a

DCS, which contained functions that the receiving machine cannot handle.

• Check the protocol dump list. • Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.

0-52 Polarity changed during communication

• Check the line connection. Retry communication.

0-70 The communication mode specified in CM/JM was not available (V.8 calling and called terminal)

• The other terminal did not have a compatible communication mode (e.g., the other terminal was a V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.)

• A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal when polling rx was initiated from the calling terminal.

0-74 The calling terminal fell back to T.30 mode, because it could not detect ANSam after sending CI.

• The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due to noise, etc.

• ANSam was too short to detect. • Check the line connection and condition. • Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.

0-75 The called terminal fell back to T.30 mode, because it could not detect a CM in response to ANSam (ANSam timeout).

• The terminal could not detect ANSam. • Check the line connection and condition. • Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.

0-76 The calling terminal fell back to T.30 mode, because it could not detect a JM in response to a CM (CM timeout).

• The called terminal could not detect a CM due to noise, etc.

• Check the line connection and condition. • Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.

0-77 The called terminal fell back to T.30 mode, because it could not detect a CJ in response to JM (JM timeout).

• The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to noise, etc.

• A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass JM to the other end.

• Check the line connection and condition. • Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.

0-79 The called terminal detected CI while waiting for a V.21 signal.

Check for line noise or other line problems. If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to T.30 mode.

0-80 The line was disconnected due to a timeout in V.34 phase 2 � line probing.

0-81 The line was disconnected due to a timeout in V.34 phase 3 � equalizer training.

0-82 The line was disconnected due to a timeout in the V.34 phase 4 � control channel start-up.

• The guard timer expired while starting these phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low signal level can cause these errors.

If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal: • Try making a call at a later time. • Try using V.17 or a slower modem using

dedicated tx parameters. • Try increasing the tx level. • Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.

9 March 2004 ERROR CODES

2-5

Trou

ble-

shoo

ting

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 0-83 The line was disconnected

due to a timeout in the V.34 control channel restart sequence.

If these errors happen at the receiving terminal: • Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting. • Try increasing the tx level. • Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same

error is frequent when receiving from multiple senders.

0-84 The line was disconnected due to abnormal signaling in V.34 phase 4 � control channel start-up.

• The signal did not stop within 10 s. • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.

0-85 The line was disconnected due to abnormal signaling in V.34 control channel restart.

• The signal did not stop within 10 s. • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.

0-86 The line was disconnected because the other terminal requested a data rate using MPh that was not available in the currently selected symbol rate.

• The other terminal was incompatible. • Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.

0-87 The control channel started after an unsuccessful primary channel.

• The receiving terminal restarted the control channel because data reception in the primary channel was not successful.

• This does not result in an error communication. 0-88 The line was disconnected

because PPR was transmitted/received 9 (default) times within the same ECM frame.

• Try using a lower data rate at the start. • Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.

2-10 The modem cannot enter tx mode

• Replace the FCU.

2-11 Only one V.21 connection flag was received

• Replace the FCU.

2-12 Modem clock irregularity • Replace the FCU. 2-13 Modem initialization error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

• Replace the FCU. 2-23 JBIG compression or

reconstruction error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

2-24 JBIG ASIC error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. 2-25 JBIG data reconstruction

error (BIH error) 2-26 JBIG data reconstruction

error (Float marker error) 2-27 JBIG data reconstruction

error (End marker error) 2-28 JBIG data reconstruction

error (Timeout)

• JBIG data error • Check the sender�s JBIG function. • Update the MBU ROM.

2-50 The machine resets itself for a fatal FCU system error

• If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the FCU.

ERROR CODES 9 March 2004

2-6

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 2-51 The machine resets itself

because of a fatal communication error

• If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the FCU.

4-01 Line current was cut • Check the line connector. • Check for line problems. • Replace the FCU.

4-10 Communication failed because of an ID Code mismatch (Closed Network) or Tel. No./CSI mismatch (Protection against Wrong Connections)

• Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs programmed correctly, then resend.

• The machine at the other end may be defective.

5-00 Data construction not possible

5-10 DCR timer expired

• Replace the FCU.

5-20 Storage impossible because of a lack of memory

5-21 Memory overflow

• Temporary memory shortage. • Test the SAF memory. • Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board

5-23 Print data error when printing a substitute rx or confidential rx message

• Test the SAF memory. • Ask the other end to resend the message. • Replace the FCU.

5-25 SAF file access error • Replace the FCU. 6-00 G3 ECM — T1 time out

during reception of facsimile data

6-01 G3 ECM — no V.21 signal was received

6-02 G3 ECM — EOR was received

• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer. • Replace the FCU.

6-04 G3 ECM — RTC not detected • Check the line connection. • Check connections from the NCU to the FCU. • Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal. • Replace the FCU.

6-05 G3 ECM — facsimile data frame not received within 18 s of CFR, but there was no line fail

• Check the line connection. • Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal. • Replace the FCU. • Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer Cross reference • Rx cable equalizer — G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

6-06 G3 ECM — coding/decoding error

• Defective FCU. • The other terminal may be defective.

6-08 G3 ECM — PIP/PIN received in reply to PPS.NULL

• The other end pressed Stop during communication.

• The other terminal may be defective. 6-09 G3 ECM — ERR received • Check for a noisy line.

• Adjust the tx levels of the communicating machines.

• See code 6-05.

9 March 2004 ERROR CODES

2-7

Trou

ble-

shoo

ting

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 6-10 G3 ECM — error frames still

received at the other end after all communication attempts at 2400 bps

• Check for line noise. • Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the

dedicated tx parameter for that address). • Check the line connection. • Defective remote terminal.

6-21 V.21 flag detected during high speed modem communication

• The other terminal may be defective or incompatible.

6-22 The machine resets the sequence because of an abnormal handshake in the V.34 control channel

• Check for line noise. • If the same error occurs frequently, replace the

FCU. • Defective remote terminal.

6-99 V.21 signal not stopped within 6 s

• Replace the FCU.

22-00 Original length exceeded the maximum scan length

• Divide the original into more than one page. • Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower

the scan resolution if possible. • Add optional page memory.

22-01 Memory overflow while receiving

• Wait for the files in the queue to be sent. • Delete unnecessary files from memory. • Transfer the substitute reception files to an

another fax machine, if the machine�s printer is busy or out of order.

• Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk. 22-02 Tx or rx job stalled due to

line disconnection at the other end

• The job started normally but did not finish normally; data may or may not have been received fully.

• Restart the machine. 22-04 The machine cannot store

received data in the SAF • Update the ROM • Replace the FCU.

23-00 Data read timeout during construction

• Restart the machine. • Replace the FCU

25-00 The machine software resets itself after a fatal transmission error occurred

• Update the ROM • Replace the FCU.

F0-xx V.34 modem error • Replace the FCU.

FAX SC CODES 9 March 2004

2-8

2.2 FAX SC CODES 2.2.1 SC1201

SC1201 indicates an unrecoverable error. The fax unit does not operate until you initialize the SRAM. When you initialize it, all user-specified data and SP settings are lost. There is no way to recover these data. SC1201 can be generated under any of the following conditions: • The SRAM backup battery is dead. • The switch of the SRAM backup battery is open. • The SRAM on the MBU is physically defective. 2.2.2 OTHER SC CODES

The FCU resets itself automatically by default. The data in the SAF memory is retained. When you want to prevent this automatic resetting, change Bit 7 of the System Switch 1F (☛ 3.2.1). The FCU displays an SC code and does not operate until you reset it. To reset it, perform as follows (either of them): • Hold down the ! and » keys until the FCU is reset (for about 10 seconds). • Turn the main power switch off and on. 2.2.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE

The table lists the SC codes generated in the fax unit. System Switch 1F

and Display Code Description Countermeasure Bit 7 = 0 Bit 7 = 1

1101 FCU error Reset the FCU (☛ 2.2.2). (None*) 1201 Unrecoverable error Initialize the SRAM (☛ 2.2.1). Service Call 1299 1305 1310 1311 1312 1401 1405

Software error Reset the FCU (☛ 2.2.2). (None*)

SC code

* Automatically reset

The table lists the SC code generated in the controller of the copier. Code Description Countermeasure Detailed Code 820 MBU error (The

jumper is loose.) Set the jumper (on the MBU) correctly.

The following codes are displayed: • SC: 820 • code: 612 • detail: 40000000

9 March 2004 INCORRECT ADDRESS BOOK

2-9

Trou

ble-

shoo

ting

2.3 INCORRECT ADDRESS BOOK Symptom The setting extension/outside is incorrectly listed in the Address Book list. Condition The symptom is caused by the following manual operation:

1. The setting extension/outside is changed (! → Fax Features → Key Operator Tools → G3 Analog Line).

2. One or some entries are added to the G3 address book (! → System Settings → Key Operator Tools → Address Book Management).

3. The Address Book is printed out. The Address Book incorrectly lists the setting extension/outside.

NOTE: For more information on the Address Book, see the Operating Instruction. Troubleshooting

1. Turn the main power switch off and on. 2. Register the entries to the address book once again. 3. Print out the Address Book. The Address Book correctly lists the setting

extension/outside. Cause This symptom is based on the specifications of the Model S-C2 facsimile. The information on the setting extension/outside is written in the Address Book when you turn on the main power switch. On the other hand, the fax application program references this information when you send a fax message. Therefore, the fax message is sent to the correct destination (regardless of the incorrect Address Book). Necessary Action After you change the setting extension/outside, turn the main power switch off and on. For the Address Book to correctly list the setting extension/outside, you must turn the main power switch off and on before you register entries. If you register some entries before turning off and on the main power switch, the setting extension/outside of these entries are incorrectly listed in the Address Book. If you register more entries after turning off and on the main power switch, the settings of these entries are correctly listed (see table).

Entry Address Book Registered before off

and on Incorrectly listed

Registered after off and on Correctly listed

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

3-1

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

3. SERVICE TABLES !CAUTION Do not turn off the main power switch while the power LED is on or blinking; otherwise, the memory may be damaged. Before turning off the main power switch, press the power key on the operation panel and wait until the power LED turns off.

NOTE: The main power LED is on or blinks under any of the following conditions: • The platen cover is open. • The copier is communicating with a network device. • The copier is accessing the memory.

3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 3.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION

!IMPORTANT Do not let the user have an access to the service program mode (SP mode). Only service representatives are allowed to use the SP mode. Should the user have an access to the SP mode, the normal operation of the machine is NOT guaranteed any more.

Activating Fax SP Mode

1. Press the » key. 2. Press the following keys in the following order: #$%

3. Press the & key and hold it down until the SP mode menus are displayed (for about three seconds).

4. Press the ‘ key. Quitting Fax SP mode Press the ! key several times until you quit the fax SP mode.

SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 9 March 2004

3-2

SP1-XXX (BIT SW) (☛ 3.2)

1 Mode No. Function System Switch 101

001 � 032 00 � 1F Change the bit switches for system settings for the fax option.

Ifax Switch 102 001 � 016 00 � 0F Change the bit switches for IFAX settings.

Printer Switch 103 001 � 016 00 � 0F Change the bit switches for printer settings

for the fax option. Communication Switch 104

001 � 032 00 � 1F Change the bit switches for communication settings for the fax option.

G3-1 Switch 105 001 � 016 00 � 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol

settings of the standard G3 board.

SP2-XXX (RAM)

2 Mode No. Function RAM Read/Write 101

001 Change RAM data for the fax board directly (☛ 3.5).

Memory Dump 102 001 G3-1 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the fax board (☛

3.5). G3-1 NCU Parameters 103 001 � 023 CC, 01 � 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard

G3 board (☛ 3.3).

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

3-3

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

SP3-XXX (Machine Set) 3 Mode No. Function

Service Station 101 001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.

Serial Number 102 001 Enter the fax unit�s serial number.

PSTN-1 Port Settings 001 Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line.

If the machine is installed on a PABX line, select �PABX�, �PABX(GND)� or �PABX(FLASH)�.

002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-1 line.

103

003 Memory Lock Disabled

If the customer does not want to receive transmissions using Memory Lock on this line, turn this SP on.

FAX Switches 201 001 � 032 00 � 1F Change the bit switches for scanner

settings for the fax option (☛ 3.2).

SP4-XXX (ROM Versions)

4 Mode No. Function 002 FCU ROM Version P/N 003 FCU ROM Version Ver. 004 FCU ROM Version Area 005 FCU ROM Version Date 006 FCU ROM Version Dver.

101

007 FCU ROM Version sum.

Displays the FCU ROM version.

102 002 :

065

Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.

002 G3-1 ROM Version Parts No. 003 G3-1 ROM Version Control

103

004 G3-1 ROM Version DSP

Displays the G3-1 modem version.

SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 9 March 2004

3-4

SP5-XXX (RAM Clear) 5 Mode No. Function

Initialize SRAM 101 001 Initializes the bit switches and user

parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in the SAF memory, and clock.

Erase All Files 102 001 Erases all files stored in the SAF

memory. Reset Bit Switches 103

001 Resets the bit switches and user parameters.

Factory setting 104 001 Resets the bit switches and user

parameters, user data in the SRAM and files in the SAF memory.

SP6-XXX (Reports)

6 Mode No. Function System Parameter List 101

001 Press the �ON� button to print the system parameter list.

Service Monitor Report 102 001 Press the �ON� button to print the service

monitor report. G3 Protocol Dump List

001 G3-1 (All Communications)

Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3-1 line.

103

002 G3-1 (1 Communication)

Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the G3-1 line.

105 All Files print out 001 Prints out all the user files in the SAF

memory, including confidential messages. NOTE: Do not use this function, unless the customer is having trouble printing confidential messages or recovering files stored using the memory lock feature.

106 Journal Print out 001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication

records on the report. 002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication

records after the specified date.

9 March 2004 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

3-5

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

6 Mode No. Function 107 Log List Print out

001 All log files 002 Printer 003 SC/TRAP Stored 004 Decompression 005 Scanner 006 JOB/SAF 007 Reconstruction 008 JBIG 009 G3 CCU 010 Fax Job 011 CCU 012 Scanner Condition

These log print out functions are for designer use only.

SP7-XXX (Tests) These are the test modes for PTT approval.

7 Function 101 G3-1 Modem Tests 102 G3-1 DTMF Tests 103 Ringer 104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud) 105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud) 106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud) 107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud) 108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud) 109 Message Test

BIT SWITCHES 9 March 2004

3-6

3.2 BIT SWITCHES

!CAUTION Do not change the settings marked with the key «Not used.» Changing these settings may cause malfunctions and/or may violate local regulations.

NOTE: For the default settings of the bit switches, see the System Parameter List (☛ SP6-101-001).

3.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES System Switch 00 SP No. 1-101-001 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Dedicated transmission

parameter programming 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated transmission parameters. Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated transmission parameters.

1 Not used Do not change the setting. Technical data printout on the Journal 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: Instead of the personal name, the following data are listed on the Journal for each G3 communication.

2

e.g. 0000 32V34 288/264 L0100 03 04 (1) (2)(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors. (2): Symbol rate (V.34 only) (3): Final modem type used (4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps) (5): Final data rate (6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level) (7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception. (8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception. Note: EQM and rx level are fixed at �FFFF� in tx mode. The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at �00� for transmission records and ECM reception records.

9 March 2004 BIT SWITCHES

3-7

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

System Switch 00 SP No. 1-101-001 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 2 Rx level calculation

Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04 The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after �L� indicates the rx level. The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -16 to get the rx level. In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256. So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB

3 Not used Do not change the setting. 4 Line error mark on the

received page 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

If this bit is 1, a mark will be printed on the left edge of the page at any place where a line error occurred in the data. Such errors are caused by a noisy line for example.

5 G3 communication parameter display 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key parameters (see below). This is normally disabled because it cancels the CSI display for the user. Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.

6 Protocol dump list output after each communication 0: Off 1: On

This is only used for communication troubleshooting. It shows the content of the transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing. If system switch 09 bit 6 is at �1�, the list is only printed if there was an error during the communication.

7 Not used Do not change the setting.

BIT SWITCHES 9 March 2004

3-8

G3 Communication Parameters Modem rate 336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps

312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps 288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps 264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps 240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps 216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps 192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps

Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm) D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm) F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm) SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm) 21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi) 22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi) 44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)

Compression mode MMR: MMR compression MR: MR compression MH: MH compression JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode) JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)

Communication mode

ECM: With ECM NML: With no ECM

Width and reduction

A4: A4 (8.3″), no reduction B4: B4 (10.1″), no reduction A3: A3 (11.7″), no reduction

I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line 10: 10 ms/line 25: 2.5 ms/line 20: 20 ms/line 5: 5 ms/line 40: 40 ms/line Note: �40� is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short protocol.

System Switch 01 — Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

9 March 2004 BIT SWITCHES

3-9

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

System Switch 02 SP No. 1-101-003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0-1 Not used Do not change the settings. 2 Communication stall fail safe.

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

If enabled, the machine cuts communication within one hour of a communication error but the connection remains established.

3-4 Not used. Do not change the settings. 5 Not used Do not change the setting. 6 to 7

Memory read/write by RDS Bit 7 6 Setting 0 0 Always disabled 0 1 User selectable 1 0 User selectable 1 1 Always enabled

(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out. (0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out, but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow RDS operations to take place. RDS will automatically be locked out again after a certain time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note that if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch off until this time limit has expired. (1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the machine.

System Switch 03 SP No. 1-101-004 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7

Length of time that RDS is temporarily switched on when bits 6 and 7 of System Switch 02 are set to �User selectable�

00 — 99 hours (BCD). This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System Switch 02 are set to �User selectable�. The default setting is 24 hours.

System Switch 04 SP No. 1-101-005 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0-2 Not used Do not change the settings. 3 Printing dedicated tx

parameters on Quick Dial Lists 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: Each Quick dial number on the list is printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes each). The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for service technicians).

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

System Switch 05 — Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 06 — Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 07 — Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 08 — Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

BIT SWITCHES 9 March 2004

3-10

System Switch 09 SP No. 1-101-010 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Not used Do not change the setting. 1 Inclusion of communications on

the Journal when no image data was exchanged. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Communications that reached phase C (message tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal. 1: Communications that reached phase A (call setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal. This will include telephone calls.

2 Automatic error report printout 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Error reports will not be printed. 1: Error reports will be printed automatically after failed communications.

3 Printing of the error code on the error report 0: No 1: Yes

1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.

4 Not used Do not change the setting. 5 Power failure report

0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1: A power failure report will be automatically printed after the power is switched on if a fax message disappeared from the memory when the power was turned off last.

6 Conditions for printing the protocol dump list 0: Print for all communications 1: Print only when there is a communication error

This switch becomes effective only when system switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1. 1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol dump list only for communications with errors.

7 Priority given to various types of remote terminal ID when printing reports 0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel. number 1: Dial label > Tel. number > RTI > CSI

This bit determines which set of priorities the machine uses when listing remote terminal names on reports. Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the Quick/Speed Dial number.

System Switch 0A SP No. 1-101-011 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0-3 Not used Do not change the settings. 4 Dialing on the ten-key pad

when the external telephone is off-hook 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when the external telephone is not by the machine, or if a wireless telephone is connected as an external telephone. 1: The user can dial on the machine�s ten-key pad when the handset is off-hook.

5 On hook dial 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: On hook dial is disabled.

6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

9 March 2004 BIT SWITCHES

3-11

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

System Switch 0B — Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 0C — Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 0D — Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0E SP No. 1-101-015 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0-2 Not used Do not change the settings. 3 Action when the external

handset goes off-hook 0: Manual tx and rx operation 1: Memory tx and rx operation (the display remains the same)

0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not possible. 1: The display stays in standby mode even when the external handset is used, so that other people can use the machine for memory tx operation. Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this setting.

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings. System Switch 0F SP No. 1-101-016 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7

Country/area code for functional settings (Hex) 00: France 11: USA 01: Germany 12: Asia 02: UK 13: Japan 03: Italy 14: Hong Kong 04: Austria 15: South Africa 05: Belgium 16: Australia 06: Denmark 17: New Zealand 07: Finland 18: Singapore 08: Ireland 19: Malaysia 09: Norway 1A: China 0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan 0B: Switz. 1C: Korea 0C: Portugal 20: Turkey 0D: Holland 21: Greece 0E: Spain 22: Hungary 0F: Israel 23: Czech 10: Canada 24: Poland

This country/area code determines the factory settings of bit switches and RAM addresses. However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter settings and communication parameter RAM addresses. Cross reference NCU country code: SP2-103 parameter C.C.

BIT SWITCHES 9 March 2004

3-12

System Switch 10 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7

Threshold memory level for parallel memory transmission

Threshold = is N x 128 kbytes + 256 kbytes N can be between 00 — FF(H) Default setting: 02(H) = 512 kbytes

System Switch 11 SP No. 1-101-018 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 TTI printing position

0: Superimposed on the page data 1: Printed before the data leading edge

Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information that the customer considers to be important (G3 transmissions).

1-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

System Switch 12 SP No. 1-101-019 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7

TTI printing position in the main scan direction

TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm Input even numbers only. This setting determines the print start position for the TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the file number which is on the top right of the page.

System Switch 13 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) System Switch 14 — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

9 March 2004 BIT SWITCHES

3-13

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

System Switch 15 SP No. 1-101-022 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Not used Do not change the setting. 1 Going into the Energy Saver

mode automatically 0: Enabled 1: Disabled

1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is active even in the Energy Saver mode.

2-3 Not used Do not change the settings. 4-5 Wait time for post message

00: 1 minute 01: 30 minutes 10: 1 hour 11: 24 hours

The machine stays in the standby mode for the specified time if it reserves a post message in memory.

6 Shows user codes on reports and lists 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

The user codes are printed on reports and lists. The default setting is «Disabled» since the user codes used for authentication should not be seen.

7 Not used Do not change the settings. System Switch 16 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) System Switch 17 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) System Switch 18 — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

System Switch 19 SP No. 1-101-026 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0-2 Not used Do not change the settings. 3 Selects a temporary address

for the number PC-FAX #. 0: When prefixed by #, handled only as a stored

address. 1: When prefixed by #, when a digit exists that

prevents handling the transaction as a Quick, Speed, or Group dialing, handles temporarily.

4 Number of jobs controlled for PC-FAX TX 0: 64 Jobs 1: No limitations (but

conforms to device limitations)

Sets the number of jobs controlled for PC-FAX transactions. If �1� is selected (no limitations), control is relinquished to the device (standard 400, expandable to 800).

5-6 Not used Do not change the settings. 7 Special original mode

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Enables the user to select the special original mode from the operation panel. When the user selects this mode, the text-mode LED and the photo-mode LED light at the same time.

BIT SWITCHES 9 March 2004

3-14

System Switch 1A — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

System Switch 1B SP No. 1-101-030 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0-1 Image mode when Text is

selected 00: Text 1 01: Text 2

00: Text 1 is the regular mode. 01: Text 2 is the sharp mode.

2-3 Image mode when Photo is selected 00: Photo 1 01: Photo 2

00: Photo 1 is the error diffusion mode. 01: Photo 2 is the dithering mode.

4-6 Image mode when Special original is selected 000: Text 1 001: Text 2 010: Photo 1 011: Photo 2 100: Special

000: Text 1 is the regular mode. 001: Text 2 is the sharp mode. 010: Photo 1 is the error diffusion mode. 011: Photo 2 is the dithering mode. 100: Special is the dropout color mode.

7 Not used Do not change the setting.

System Switch 1C — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

System Switch 1D SP No. 1-101-030 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 RTI/CSI display

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: RTI/CSI is displayed on the top line of the LCD panel during communication.

1-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

9 March 2004 BIT SWITCHES

3-15

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

System Switch 1E SP No. 1-101-031 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Communication after the

Journal data storage area has become full 0: Impossible 1: Possible

This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the report (e.g., no paper). 0: If the buffer memory of the communication records for the Journal has become full, fax communications will become impossible, to prevent overwriting the communication records before the machine prints them out. 1: If the buffer memory of the communication records for the Journal is full, fax communications are still possible. But the machine will overwrite the oldest communication records. Cross Reference • Automatic Journal output — User switch 03 bit 7 • Number of communication records for the

Journal: 200 records (standard) 1000 records (with the Function Upgrade unit installed)

1 Action when the SAF memory has become full during scanning 0: The current page is erased. 1: The entire file is erased.

0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning, the successfully scanned pages are transmitted. 1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning, the file is erased and no pages are transmitted. This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory transmission.

2 RTI/CSI display priority 0: RTI 1: CSI

This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is displayed on the LCD while the machine is communicating in G3 non-standard mode.

3 File No. printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled

1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.

4 Action when authorized reception is enabled but authorized RTIs/CSIs are not yet programmed 0: All fax reception is disabled 1: Faxes can be received if the sender has an RTI or CSI

If authorized reception is enabled but the user has stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the machine will not be able to receive any fax messages. If the customer wishes to receive messages from any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block messages from senders that do not include an RTI or CSI, change this bit to �1�, then enable Authorized Reception. Otherwise, keep this bit at �0 (default setting)�.

5-7 Not used Do not change the setting.

BIT SWITCHES 9 March 2004

3-16

System Switch 1F SP No. 1-101-032 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Not used Do not change the setting. 1 Report printout after an original

jam during SAF storage or if the SAF memory fills up 0: Enabled 1: Disabled

0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory overflows during scanning, a report will be printed. Change this bit to �1� if the customer does not want to have a report in these cases. Memory tx � Memory storage report Parallel memory tx � Transmission result report

2 Not used Do not change the setting. 3 Received fax print start timing

(G3 reception) 0: After receiving each page 1: After receiving all pages

0: The machine prints each page immediately after the machine receives it. 1: The machine prints the complete message after the machine receives all the pages in the memory.

4-6 Not used Do not change the factory settings. 7 Action when a fax SC has

occurred 0: Automatic reset 1: Fax unit stops

0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other than SC1201, the fax unit automatically resets itself. 1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the fax unit stops. Cross Reference Fax SC codes — See �Troubleshooting�

9 March 2004 BIT SWITCHES

3-17

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

3.2.2 IFAX SWITCHES

See the IFAX Service Manual. 3.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES Printer Switch 00 SP No. 1-103-001 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Page separation mark

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: No marks are printed. 1: If a received page has to be printed out on two sheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is printed at the bottom right hand corner of the first sheet, and a �2� inside a small box is printed at the top right hand corner of the second sheet. This helps the user to identify pages that have been split.

1 Repetition of data when the received page is longer than the printer paper 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: The next page continues from where the previous page left off. 1: The final few mm of the previous page are repeated at the top of the next page. The amount of repeated data depends on printer switch 04, bits 5 and 6.

2 Prints the date and time on received fax messages 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This switch is only effective when user parameter 02 — bit 2 (printing the received date and time on received fax messages) is enabled. 1: The machine prints the received and printed date and time at the bottom of each received page.

3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Printer Switch 01 — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

The table lists the paper sizes and print widths used in the setup protocol.

Available Paper Size Print width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS) A4 or 8.5″ x 11″ 297 mm width

B5 256 mm width A5 or 8.5″ x 5.5″ 216 mm width

No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width

BIT SWITCHES 9 March 2004

3-18

Printer Switch 02 SP No. 1-103-003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1st paper feed station usage for

fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled

1 2nd paper feed station usage for fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled

0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax messages and reports. 1: The specified paper feed station will not be used for printing fax messages and reports. Note: Do not disable usage for a paper feed station which has been specified by User Parameter Switch 0F (15), or which is used for the Specified Cassette Selection feature.

2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Printer Switch 03 SP No. 1-103-004 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Length reduction of received

data 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Incoming pages are printed without length reduction. (Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4 to 7) 1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing. (Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04, bits 0 to 4)

1-3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 to 7

Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above) If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the excess portion will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page. The value of x is determined by these four bits. Hex value of bits 4 to 7 x (mm) 0 0 1 1 and so on until F 15 Default setting: 6 mm Cross reference Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0

9 March 2004 BIT SWITCHES

3-19

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Printer Switch 04 SP No. 1-103-005 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 4

Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above. <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm) �N� is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4. Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 mm 0 0 0 0 1 5 mm 0 0 1 0 0 20 mm (default setting) 1 1 1 1 1 155 mm For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)

5 to 6

Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken place.

usedNotmmmmmm =

=

=

=

11,15

10,10

01,4

00

7 Not used. Do not change the setting.

Printer Switch 05 — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

Printer Switch 06 SP No. 1-103-007 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Printing while a paper cassette

is pulled out, when the Just Size Printing feature is enabled. 0: Printing will not start 1: Printing will start if another cassette has a suitable size of paper, based on the paper size selection priority tables.

Cross reference Just size printing on/off � User switch 05, bit 5

1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.

Printer Switch 07 SP No. 1-103-008 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0-3 Not used. Do not change the settings. 4 List of destinations in the

Communication Failure Report for broadcasting 0: All destinations 1: Only destinations where communication failure occurred

1: Only destinations where communication failure occurred are printed on the Communication Failure Report.

5-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.

BIT SWITCHES 9 March 2004

3-20

Printer Switch 08 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Printer Switch 09 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Printer Switch 0A — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Printer Switch 0B — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Printer Switch 0C — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Printer Switch 0D — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

Printer Switch 0E SP No. 1-103-015 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Paper size selection priority

0: Width 1: Length

0: A paper size that has the same width as the received data is selected first. 1: A paper size which has enough length to print all the received lines without reduction is selected first.

1 Paper size selected for printing A4 width fax data 0: 8.5″ x 11″ size 1: A4 size

This switch determines which paper size is selected for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has both A4 and 8.5″ x 11″ size paper.

2 Page separation 0: Enabled 1: Disabled

1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page separation to print a received fax message, the machine does not print the message (Substitute Reception is used). After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the machine automatically prints the fax message.

3 to 4

Printing the sample image on reports Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting 0 0 The upper half only 0 1 50% reduction in sub-scan only 1 0 Same size 1 1 Not used

�Same size� means the sample image is printed at 100%, even if page separation occurs. User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to �0� to enable this switch. Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on this feature.

5-6 Not used Do not change the settings. 7 Equalizing the reduction ratio

among separated pages (Page Separation) 0: Enabled 1: Disabled

0: When page separation has taken place, all the pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio. 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected paper size when page separation has taken place. Other pages are printed without reduction.

9 March 2004 BIT SWITCHES

3-21

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Printer Switch 0F SP No. 1-103-016 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 1

Smoothing feature Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Disabled 1 0 Enabled 1 1 Not used

(0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine receives halftone images from other manufacturers fax machines frequently.

2-3 Not used Do not change the settings. 4 Printing fax messages in user

code mode 0: Enabled 1: Disabled

1: The machine holds the received fax messages until the machine exits the restricted access mode (user code or key counter). If the machine enters the restricted access mode again while printing fax messages, the machine stops printing the machine exits the mode again.

5-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

BIT SWITCHES 9 March 2004

3-22

3.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES Communication Switch 00 SP No. 1-104-001 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 1

Compression modes available in receive mode Bit 1 0 Modes 0 0 MH only 0 1 MH/MR 1 0 MH/MR/MMR 1 1 MH/MR/MMR/ JBIG

These bits determine the compression capabilities to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.

2 to 3

Compression modes available in transmit mode Bit 3 2 Modes 0 0 MH only 0 1 MH/MR 1 0 MH/MR/MMR 1 1 MH/MR/MMR/ JBIG

These bits determine the compression capabilities to be used in the transmission and to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.

4 Not used Do not change the setting. 5 JBIG compression method:

Reception 0: Only basic supported 1: Basic and optional both supported

Change the setting when communication problems occur using JBIG compression.

6 JBIG compression method: Transmission 0: Basic mode priority 1: Optional mode priority

Change the setting when communication problems occur using JBIG compression.

7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 01 SP No. 1-104-002 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 ECM

0: Off 1: On If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all communications. In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are switched off automatically.

1-5 Not used Do not change the settings. 6 to 7

Maximum printable page length available Bit 7 6 Setting 0 0 No limit 0 1 B4 (364 mm) 1 0 A4 (297 mm) 1 1 Not used

The setting determined by these bits is informed to the transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).

9 March 2004 BIT SWITCHES

3-23

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Communication Switch 02 SP No. 1-104-003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Burst error threshold

0: Low 1: High If there are more consecutive error lines in the received page than the threshold, the machine will send a negative response. The Low and High threshold values depend on the sub-scan resolution, and are as follows. Resolution 100 dpi 200 dpi 400 dpi 3.85 l/mm 7.7 l/mm 15.4 l/mm Low settings 6 12 24 High settings 12 24 48

1 Acceptable total error line ratio 0: 5% 1: 10%

If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.

2 Treatment of pages received with errors during G3 reception 0: Deleted from memory without printing 1: Printed

0: Pages received with errors are not printed.

3 Hang-up decision when a negative code (RTN or PIN) is received during G3 immediate transmission 0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up

0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is received. 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it receives RTN or PIN. This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if ECM is being used.

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 03 SP No. 1-104-004 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7

Maximum number of page retransmissions in a G3 memory transmission

00 — FF (Hex) times. This setting is not used if ECM is switched on. Default setting — 03(H)

Communication Switch 04 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 05 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 06 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 07 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 08 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 09 — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

Communication Switch 0A SP No. 1-104-011 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Point of resumption of memory

transmission upon redialing 0: From the error page 1: From page 1

0: The transmission begins from the page where transmission failed the previous time. 1: Transmission begins from the first page, using normal memory transmission.

1-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

BIT SWITCHES 9 March 2004

3-24

Communication Switch 0B — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 0C — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

Communication Switch 0D SP No. 1-104-014 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7

The available memory threshold, below which ringing detection (and therefore reception into memory) is disabled

00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes (e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes) One page is about 24 kbytes. The machine refers to this setting before each fax reception. If the amount of remaining memory is below this threshold, the machine cannot receive any fax messages. If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect ringing signals and go into receive mode even if there is no memory available. This will result in communication failure.

Communication Switch 0E SP No. 1-104-015 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7

Minimum interval between automatic dialing attempts

06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s) This value is the minimum time that the machine waits before it dials the next destination.

Communication Switch 0F — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

Communication Switch 10 SP No. 1-104-017 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7

Memory transmission: Maximum number of dialing attempts to the same destination

01 — FE (Hex) times

Communication Switch 11 — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

Communication Switch 12 SP No. 1-104-019 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7

Memory transmission: Interval between dialing attempts to the same destination

01 — FF (Hex) minutes

Communication Switch 13 — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

9 March 2004 BIT SWITCHES

3-25

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Communication Switch 14 SP No. 1-104-021 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Inch-to-mm conversion during

transmission 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch format are transmitted without conversion. In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF memory in mm format are transmitted without conversion. Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF memory, the fax unit always converts the data into mm format. 1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored data in the SAF memory to the format which was specified in the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before transmission.

1-5 Not used Do not change the factory settings. 6 to 7

Available unit of resolution in which fax messages are received Bit 7 Bit 6 Unit 0 0 mm 0 1 inch 1 0 mm and inch (default) 1 1 Not used

For the best performance, do not change the factory settings. The setting determined by these bits is informed to the transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).

Communication Switch 15 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 16 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 17 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 18 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 19 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 1A — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

Communication Switch 1B SP No. 1-104-028 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7

Extension access code (0 to 7) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off 0: On 1: Off

If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol procedure, set this bit to �1� to disable V.8. Example: If �0� is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 to 1. When the machine detects �0� as the first dialed number, it automatically disables V.8 protocol. (Alternatively, if �3� is the PSTN access code, set bit 3 to 1.)

BIT SWITCHES 9 March 2004

3-26

Communication Switch 1C SP No. 1-104-029 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 1

Extension access code (8 and 9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off 0: On 1: Off

Refer to communication switch 1E. Example: If �8� is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 to 1. When the machine detects �8� as the first dialed number, it automatically disables V.8 protocol. (If �9� is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)

2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

Communication Switch 1D — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 1E — Not used (Do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 1F — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

9 March 2004 BIT SWITCHES

3-27

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

3.2.5 G3-1 SWITCHES G3-1 Switch 00 SP No. 1-105-001 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 1

Monitor speaker during communication (tx and rx) Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Up to Phase B 1 0 All the time 1 1 Not used

(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through the communication. (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the T.30 protocol. (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on all through the communication. Make sure that you reset these bits after testing.

2 Monitor speaker during memory transmission 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory transmission.

3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3-1 Switch 01 SP No. 1-105-002 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0-3 Not used Do not change the settings. 4 DIS frame length

0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are communication problems with PC-based faxes which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).

5 Not used Do not change the setting. 6 CED/ANSam transmission

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Do not change this setting, unless the communication problem is caused by the CED/ANSam transmission.

7 Not used Do not change the setting.

G3-1 Switch 02 SP No. 1-105-003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 G3 protocol mode used

0: Standard and non-standard 1: Standard only

Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only communicate with machines that send T.30-standard frames only. 1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in non-standard mode communication)

1-4 Not used Do not change the settings. 5 Use of modem rate history for

transmission using Quick/Speed Dials 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials always start from the highest modem rate. 1: The machine refers to the modem rate history for communications with the same machine when determining the most suitable rate for the current communication.

6 AI short protocol (transmission and reception) 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.

7 Short preamble 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual for details about Short Preamble.

BIT SWITCHES 9 March 2004

3-28

G3-1 Switch 03 SP No. 1-105-004 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 DIS detection number

(Echo countermeasure) 0: 1 1: 2

0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same DIS frame twice. 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.

1 Not used Do not change the setting. 2 V.8 protocol

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible. Note: Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps or lower.

3 ECM frame size 0: 256 bytes 1: 64 bytes

Keep this bit at �0� in most cases.

4 CTC transmission conditions 0: After one PPR signal received 1: After four PPR signals received (ITU-T standard)

0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS) mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0, 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.

NTransmit N send≤ Re NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted 1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving four PPRs. PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals. This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

5 Modem rate used for the next page after receiving a negative code (RTN or PIN) 0: No change 1: Fallback

1: The machine�s tx modem rate will fall back before sending the next page if a negative code is received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.

6 Not used Do not change the setting. 7 Polarity detection switch

1: On (Default for Japan model) 0: Off (Default for other models)

The facsimile may incorrectly detect the polarity in some environments. In such environments, the facsimile mistakenly closes an established communication. To prevent this problem, you can turn off the polarity detection switch. When this switch is off, the Communicating LED or an accounting-management program takes tame to turn on.

9 March 2004 BIT SWITCHES

3-29

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

G3-1 Switch 04 SP No. 1-105-005 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 3

Training error detection threshold

0 — F (Hex); 0 — 15 bits If the number of error bits in the received TCF is below this threshold, the machine informs the sender that training has succeeded.

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3-1 Switch 05 SP No. 1-105-006 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 3

Initial Tx modem rate Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) 0 0 0 1 2.4 k 0 0 1 0 4.8 k 0 0 1 1 7.2 k 0 1 0 0 9.6 k 0 1 0 1 12.0 k 0 1 1 0 14.4 k 0 1 1 1 16.8 k 1 0 0 0 19.2 k 1 0 0 1 21.6 k 1 0 1 0 24.0 k 1 0 1 1 26.4 k 1 1 0 0 28.8 k 1 1 0 1 31.2 k 1 1 1 0 33.6 k Other settings — Not used

These bits set the initial starting modem rate for transmission. Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need to change this for specific receivers. If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled manually. Cross reference V.8 protocol on/off — G3 switch 03, bit2

4 to 5

Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2 kbps. Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting 0 0 V.29 0 1 V.17 1 0 V.34 1 1 Not used

These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.

6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

BIT SWITCHES 9 March 2004

3-30

G3-1 Switch 06 SP No. 1-105-007 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 3

Initial Rx modem rate Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) 0 0 0 1 2.4 k 0 0 1 0 4.8 k 0 0 1 1 7.2 k 0 1 0 0 9.6 k 0 1 0 1 12.0 k 0 1 1 0 14.4 k 0 1 1 1 16.8 k 1 0 0 0 19.2 k 1 0 0 1 21.6 k 1 0 1 0 24.0 k 1 0 1 1 26.4 k 1 1 0 0 28.8 k 1 1 0 1 31.2 k 1 1 1 0 33.6 k Other settings — Not used

These bits set the initial starting modem rate for reception. Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems during reception. If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled manually. Cross reference V.8 protocol on/off — G3 switch 03, bit2

4 to 7

Modem types available for reception Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting 0 0 0 1 V.27ter 0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29 0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29 V.33 0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V.33 0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V33, V.34 Other settings — Not used

The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available modem type for the machine in receive mode. If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be disabled manually. Cross reference V.8 protocol on/off — G3 switch 03, bit2

9 March 2004 BIT SWITCHES

3-31

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

G3-1 Switch 07 SP No. 1-105-008 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 1

PSTN cable equalizer (tx mode: Internal) Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange. Use the dedicated transmission parameters for specific receivers. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs. • Communication error • Modem rate fallback occurs frequently. Note: This setting is not effective in V.34 communications.

2 to 3

PSTN cable equalizer (rx mode: Internal) Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs. • Communication error with error codes such as

0-20, 0-23, etc. • Modem rate fallback occurs frequently. Note: This setting is not effective in V.34 communications.

4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

G3-1 Switch 08 — Not used (Do not change the settings.) G3-1 Switch 09 — Not used (Do not change the settings.)

BIT SWITCHES 9 March 2004

3-32

G3-1 Switch 0A SP No. 1-105-011 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 1

Maximum allowable carrier drop during image data reception Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) 0 0 200 0 1 400 1 0 800 1 1 Not used

These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop time. Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is frequent.